2017 Dodge Challenger User`s Guide

W h et h er it ’s p ro v i d i ng i nfo rm ati o n a b o u t s p e c i f i c p ro d u c t fe a tu re s ,
t a kin g a t ou r thro u g h yo ur v e hi c l e ’s h e ri tag e , k n o wi n g wh a t s te p s
t o t a ke f ollowing an ac c i de n t o r s c h e d u l i n g yo ur n e xt a p p o i n tm e n t,
w e know y ou ’ll f in d t h e ap p a n i mp o rta n t e xte n s i o n o f yo u r Do d g e b ra n d
vehi c l e . S im p ly d own lo a d the ap p , s e l e c t yo u r ma k e an d m o d e l a n d e n j o y
the ri de . To g et t h is a p p , g o di re c tl y to th e Ap p Sto re o r Go o g l e P l a y a n d
e nter the sea r ch key wor d “ D o d g e ” (U . S. m ark e ts o nl y).
Dodge. c o m / E N / O wn e r s pro v i de s s pe c i al o ffe rs tai l o re d to yo u r n e e d s ,
c ustom iz ed veh icle g a l l e ri e s , p e rs o n a l i ze d s e rv i c e re c o rd s a n d m o re .
To ge t th is in f or m a t ion , j u s t c re ate an ac c o u n t an d c he c k b a c k o fte n .
DOWNLOAD A FREE
ELECTRONIC COPY OF THE OWNER’S
MANUAL AND WARRANTY BOOKLET
2017
USER
CHALLENGER
GUIDE
INCLUDES SRT 392/SRT HELLCAT
BY VISITING:
W W W. MOPA R .COM / DODGE,
W W W.DODGE .COM / E N / O W NE R S / M A NU A L S
OR W W W.DODGE .COM / E N / WA R R A N T Y (U.S.);
W W W . O W N E R S . M O P A R . C A / E N ( C A N A D A ).
© 2 017 F C A U S L L C . A L L R I G H T S R E S E R V E D .
DODGE IS A REGISTERED TRADEMARK OF FCA US LLC.
17D491-926-AA
C H A L L E N GE R
F OURT H E DI T IO N REV 1
US E R GUI DE
IMPORTANT
This User Guide is intended to familiarize you with the important
f e a t u r e s o f y o u r v e h i c l e . Yo u r O w n e r ’s M a n u a l , N a v i g a t i o n / U c o n n e c t
Manuals and Warranty Booklets can be found on your DVD (if applicable)
or by visiting the website on the back cover of your User Guide. We hope
you find it useful. U.S. residents can purchase replacement kits by
v i s i t i n g w w w. t e c h a u t h o r i t y. c o m a n d C a n a d i a n r e s i d e n t s c a n p u r c h a s e
replacement kits by calling 1-800-387-1143.
If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you
may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Owner’s
Manual, Navigation/Uconnect Manuals or Warranty Booklets by
calling 1-800-423-6343 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
or by contacting your dealer.
T h e d r i v e r ’s p r im a r y r e s p o n s i b i l i t y
is the safe operation of the
v e h i c l e . D r i v i ng w h i l e d i s t r a c t e d
can result in loss of vehicle
c o n t r o l , r e s u l t i ng i n a c o l l i s i o n
a n d p e r s o n a l i n j u r y. F C A U S L L C
s t r o ng l y r e c o mm e n d s t h a t t h e
d r i v e r u s e e x t r e m e c au t i o n w h e n
u s i ng a n y d e v i c e o r f e a t u r e t h a t
may take their at tention of f the
road. Use of any electrical devices,
such as cellular telephones,
c o mp u t e r s ,
por table
radios,
vehicle
n a v ig a t i o n
or
other
devices, by the driver while the
v e h i c l e i s m o v i ng i s d a ng e r o u s
and could lead to a serious
c o l l i s i o n . Te x t i ng w h i l e d r i v i ng i s
a l s o d a ng e r o u s a n d s h o u l d n e v e r
be done while the vehicle is
m o v i ng . I f y o u f i n d y o u r s e l f u n a b l e
to devote your full at tention to
vehicle operation, pull of f the
road to a safe location and stop
your vehicle. Some states or
provinces prohibit the use of
c e l l u l a r t e l e p h o n e s o r t e x t i ng
w h i l e d r i v i ng . I t i s a l w a y s t h e
d r i v e r ’s r e s p o n s i b i l i t y t o c o mp l y
with all local laws.
DODGE.COM (U.S.)
DODGE.CA (CANADA)
T h i s g u i d e h a s b e e n pr epar ed t o help y ou get quickly acquaint ed wit h y our
n e w Do d g e b ra n d v ehicle and t o pr ovide a convenient r ef er ence sour ce f or
c o m m o n q u e s ti o n s . H owever, it is not a subst it ut e f or y our Owner ’s Manual.
F o r c o m p l e te o p e rat ional inst r uct ions, maint enance pr ocedur es and
i m p o rta n t s a fe ty messages, please consult y our Owner ’s Manual,
Na v i g a ti o n /Uc o n n e ct Manuals and ot her War ning Labels in y our vehicle.
No t a l l fe a tu re s s hown in t his guide may apply t o y our vehicle. For
a d d i ti o n a l i n fo rm a t ion on accessor ies t o help per sonaliz e y our vehicle,
v i s i t www. m o p a r. c om ( U.S.) , www.mopar.ca ( Canada) or y our local
Do d g e b ra n d d e a l e r.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents.
Yo u r d r i v i n g a b i l i t y c a n b e s e r i o u s l y i m p a i r e d w i t h b l o o d a l c o h o l
levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive.
R i d e w i t h a d e s i g n a t e d n o n - d r i n k i n g d r i v e r, c a l l a c a b , a f r i e n d , o r
use public transportation.
WARNING!
D r i v i n g a f t e r d r i n k i n g c a n l e a d t o a n a c c i d e n t . Yo u r p e r c e p t i o n s a r e
l e s s s h a r p , y o u r r e f l e x e s a r e s l o w e r, a n d y o u r j u d g m e n t i s i m p a i r e d
when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION/WELCOME
DRIVER COCKPIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . 8
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY . .
PROGRAMMABLE FEATURES . . . . .
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER
(HomeLink) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POWER OUTLETS . . . . . . . . . . .
GETTING STARTED
UTILITY
VEHICLE USER GUIDE (U.S. MARKET ONLY)
— IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
KEY FOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . 15
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO — PASSIVE
ENTRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO — IGNITION . . . 18
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM . . . . . . . . 20
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS . . . . 20
HEAD RESTRAINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
SEATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
HEATED STEERING WHEEL . . . . . . . . 60
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING
COLUMN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
TRAILER TOWING WEIGHTS (MAXIMUM
TRAILER WEIGHT RATINGS) . . . . . . . 167
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.) . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
WELCOME FROM FCA US LLC
....... 3
CONTROLS AT A GLANCE
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE BREAK-IN
RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
TURN SIGNAL/WIPER/WASHER/HIGH BEAM
LEVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
HEADLIGHT SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
SPEED CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) . . . . 72
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST . . . . . 77
EIGHT-SPEED AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
AUTOSTICK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
SPORT MODE — WITHOUT PERFORMANCE
CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
MANUAL TRANSMISSION 1 TO 4 SKIP
SHIFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE
CONTROLS (ATC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
PARKVIEW REAR BACK-UP CAMERA . . . 85
BLIND SPOT MONITORING . . . . . . . . . 86
POWER SUNROOF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
WIND BUFFETING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
ELECTRONICS
YOUR VEHICLE'S SOUND SYSTEM . . . . 90
IDENTIFYING YOUR RADIO . . . . . . . . . 92
CYBERSECURITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
SIRIUSXM GUARDIAN — IF EQUIPPED . . 94
UCONNECT 5.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
UCONNECT 5.0 VOICE RECOGNITION
QUICK TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
UCONNECT 8.4/8.4 NAV . . . . . . . . . . 113
UCONNECT 8.4/8.4 NAV VOICE
RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS . . . . . . . . 134
UCONNECT PHONE . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
. 156
. . 157
. . 161
. . 162
. . 165
SRT
DRIVE MODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
SRT PERFORMANCE FEATURES . . . . . 171
UCONNECT PERFORMANCE PAGES . . . 174
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . 177
WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS . . . 177
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . . . . . 185
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING . . . . . 186
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED . . . 193
BATTERY LOCATION . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
JUMP STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . 199
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE . . . . . . . 202
MANUAL PARK RELEASE — 8 SPEED
TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . . . . 205
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) . . . . . 207
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD . . .
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L . . .
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 5.7L . . .
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 6.2L
SUPERCHARGED . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 6.4L . . .
FLUID CAPACITIES — DODGE . . . . .
FLUID CAPACITIES — SRT . . . . . . .
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE
PARTS — DODGE . . . . . . . . . . . .
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE
PARTS — SRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES . . . . .
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE — 3.6L . .
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE — 5.7L .
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE — 6.2L
SUPERCHARGED . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE — 6.4L . .
FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . .
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION . .
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES . . .
. 208
. 210
. 212
.
.
.
.
214
216
218
219
. 220
.
.
.
.
223
224
225
226
.
.
.
.
.
231
232
237
242
249
. 259
TABLE OF CONTENTS
ADDING FUEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
REPLACEMENT BULBS . . . . . . . . . . 262
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS IN THE
UNITED STATES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
MOPAR® ACCESSORIES
FCA US LLC CUSTOMER CENTER
FCA CANADA INC. CUSTOMER
CENTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ASSISTANCE FOR THE HEARING
IMPAIRED . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PUBLICATIONS ORDERING . . . .
2
. . . . 263
AUTHENTIC ACCESSORIES BY
MOPAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
. . . . 263
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
. . . . 263
. . . . 263
FAQs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
INTRODUCTION/WELCOME
WELCOME FROM FCA US LLC
Congratulations on selecting your new FCA US LLC (“FCA US”) vehicle. Be assured that
it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality.
Your new FCA US vehicle has characteristics to enhance the driver's control under some
driving conditions. These are to assist the driver and are never a substitute for attentive
driving. They can never take the driver's place. Always drive carefully.
Your new vehicle has many features for the comfort and convenience of you and your
passengers. Some of these should not be used when driving because they take your eyes
from the road or your attention from driving. Never text while driving or take your eyes,
more than momentarily, off the road.
This guide illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are
either standard or optional on this vehicle. This guide may also include a description of
features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle.
Please disregard any features and equipment described in this guide that are not available
on this vehicle. FCA US reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications
and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation
upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
This User Guide has been prepared to help you quickly become acquainted with the
important features of your vehicle. It contains most things you will need to operate and
maintain the vehicle, including emergency information.
The DVD includes a computer application containing detailed Owner's information which
can be viewed on a personal computer or MAC computer. The multimedia DVD also
includes videos which can be played on any standard DVD player (including the Uconnect
Touchscreen Radios if equipped with DVD player capabilities). Additional DVD operational information is located on the back of the DVD sleeve.
For complete owner information,
www.dodge.com/en/owners/manuals.
refer
to
your
Owner's
Manual
on
FCA US is committed to protecting our environment and natural resources. By converting
from paper to electronic delivery for the majority of the user information for your vehicle,
together we greatly reduce the demand for tree-based products and lessen the stress on
our environment.
3
INTRODUCTION/WELCOME
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be
deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution (excluding legal lines).
WARNING!
• Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of vehicle control and increase the risk
of serious personal injury.
• Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the driver foot well while the vehicle
is moving. Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal and accelerator pedal
causing a loss of vehicle control.
• Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or mounting can cause interference
with the brake pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of control of the
vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons.
A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not
to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children.
A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Never use the ‘PARK’ position as a substitute for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible
injury or damage.
• Refer to your Owner's Manual for further details.
4
INTRODUCTION/WELCOME
USE OF AFTERMARKET PRODUCTS (ELECTRONICS)
The use of aftermarket devices including cell phones, MP3 players, GPS systems, or
chargers may affect the performance of on-board wireless features including Keyless
Enter-N-Go and Remote Start range. If you are experiencing difficulties with any of your
wireless features, try disconnecting your aftermarket devices to see if the situation
improves. If your symptoms persist, please see an authorized dealer.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best,
has factory-trained technicians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and cares about your
satisfaction.
5
C O N T R O L S AT A G L A N C E
DRIVER COCKPIT
1. Headlight Switch pg. 67
2. Instrument Cluster Display Controls pg. 157
3. Instrument Cluster pg. 8
4. Speed Control pg. 69
5. Adaptive Cruise Control pg. 72
6. Engine Start/Stop Button pg. 18
7. Identify Your Uconnect Radio pg. 92
8. Glove Compartment
9. Power Outlet pg. 165
6
C O N T R O L S AT A G L A N C E
10. Gear Selector
11. Emergency Flashers
12. Climate Controls pg. 82
13. Decklid Button
14. Emergency Brake
15. Hood Release
16. Power Mirrors
17. Power Windows
18. Power Door Locks
7
C O N T R O L S AT A G L A N C E
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
1. Tachometer
2. Indicators And Warning Lights
3. Temperature Gauge
(See page 177 for Instrument Cluster Warning Lights.)
8
C O N T R O L S AT A G L A N C E
4. Fuel Gauge And Fuel Door Locator
5. Speedometer
6. Indicator And Warning Lights
(See page 184 for Instrument Cluster Indicator Lights.)
9
GETTING STARTED
VEHICLE USER GUIDE (U.S. MARKET ONLY) — IF EQUIPPED
Access your Owner’s Information – right through your Uconnect 8.4 or 8.4 NAV touchscreen radio — If Equipped (See page 92 for Identifying your radio).
To access the Vehicle User Guide on your Uconnect Touchscreen: Push the Uconnect
Apps button, then push the Vehicle User Guide icon on your touchscreen. No Uconnect
registration is required.
NOTE:
Vehicle User Guide features are not available while the vehicle is moving. If you try to
access while the vehicle is in motion, the system will display: Feature not available while
the vehicle is in motion.
Pre-Installed Features
• Your User Guide — Updated in real-time • Available when and where you need it
• Touchscreen convenience
• Customizable interface
• Maintenance schedules and information • Multilingual
• Comprehensive icon & symbol glossary
Vehicle User Guide Home Screen
10
GETTING STARTED
Once you launch your Vehicle User Guide, you will be able to explore your warranty
information and radio manual when and where you need them. Your Uconnect radio will
display the Vehicle User Guide on your touchscreen radio to assist in better understanding
your vehicle. There’s no app to download, no phone to connect and no external device
needed for playback. Plus, it’s updated throughout the year, in real-time, so it never goes
out of date.
Features/Benefits
• Pre-installed on your Uconnect touchscreen radio
• Enhanced search and browsing capability
• Robust NAV application — If Equipped
• Add selected topics to a fast-access Favorites category
• Icon and symbol glossary
• Warranty information
• Crucial driver information and assistance:
•
•
•
Operating Instructions
Warranty Information
Fluid Level Standards
•
•
•
Maintenance Schedules
Emergency Procedures
911 Contact and More
Tip: When viewing a topic, tap the star icon to add it to your Favorites, for easy access in
the future.
Enhanced Search And Browsing Capability
Icon And Symbol Glossary
11
GETTING STARTED
KEY FOB
Description Of Key Fob
The key fob contains the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) key fob and an emergency key,
which stores in the rear of the key fob.
The emergency key allows for entry into the
vehicle should the battery in the vehicle or
the key fob go dead. The emergency key is
also for locking/unlocking the storage compartment. You can keep the emergency key
with you when valet parking.
To remove the emergency key, slide the
mechanical latch on the back of the key fob
sideways with your thumb and then pull the
key out with your other hand.
The key fob allows you to lock or unlock the
doors and trunk lid from distances up to
approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a handheld key fob. The key fob does not need to
be pointed at the vehicle to activate the
system.
Base Key Fob
1 — Trunk
2 — Unlock
3 — Lock
4 — Remote Start — If Equipped
5 — Panic Alarm
6 — Emergency Key
NOTE:
In the ON/RUN ignition position, the lock button is disabled. Only the unlock button is
enabled.
12
GETTING STARTED
SRT/Hellcat Key Fobs
NOTE:
SRT vehicles equipped with the 6.2L Supercharged engine come with three key fobs (two
red and one black) that allow for different engine power levels. Please refer to the "Drive
Modes" in “SRT” in this guide for further descriptions.
SRT Key Fob
1 — Trunk
2 — Unlock
SRT Hellcat Key Fob
3 — Lock
4 — Remote Start
5 — Panic Alarm
6 — Emergency Key
Locking And Unlocking The Doors
Push and release the lock button on the key fob to lock all doors. The turn signal lights will
flash, and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal.
Push and release the unlock button on the key fob once to unlock the driver's door or twice
within five seconds to unlock all doors. The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the
unlock signal. The illuminated entry system will also turn on.
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either the driver's door or all doors on
the first push of the unlock button on the key fob. To change the current setting, refer to
your “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” in the Owner's
Manual on www.dodge.com/en/owners/manuals for further information.
13
GETTING STARTED
Opening The Trunk
Push the trunk release button on the key fob two times within five seconds to open the
trunk.
Panic Alarm
1. Push the PANIC button once to turn the panic alarm on.
2. Wait approximately three seconds and push the button a second time to turn the panic
alarm off.
Emergency Key
Should the battery in the vehicle or the key fob go dead, there is an emergency key located
in the key fob that can be used for locking and unlocking the doors. To remove the
emergency key, slide the button at the top of the key fob sideways with your thumb and
then pull the key out with your other hand.
NOTE:
In case the ignition switch does not change with the push of a button, the key fob may
have a low or dead battery. In this situation, a back up method can be used to operate the
ignition switch. Put the nose side of the key fob (side opposite of the Emergency Key)
against the ENGINE START/STOP button and push to operate the ignition switch.
Emergency Key
WARNING!
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the keyless ignition node is in the OFF
mode, remove the key fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
14
GETTING STARTED
WARNING!
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons.
A child or others could be severely injured or killed. Children should be warned not
to touch the parking brake, brake pedal, or the transmission gear selector. Do not
leave the key fob inside the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ON/RUN
mode. A child could start the vehicle, operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat
build-up may cause them to be severely injured or killed.
• Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of the Remote Start System, windows,
door locks, or other controls could cause serious injury or death.
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED
Push the remote start button on the key fob twice within five seconds. Pushing the remote
start button a third time shuts the engine off.
To drive the vehicle, push the Keyless Enter-N-Go START/STOP button to place the
ignition in the ON/RUN mode.
With Remote Start, the engine will only run for 15 minutes (time-out) unless the ignition
is placed in the ON/RUN mode.
The vehicle must be started with the START/STOP button after two consecutive time-outs.
WARNING!
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or confined area. Exhaust gas
contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury or death when inhaled.
• Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of the Remote Start System, windows, door locks or other controls could cause serious injury or death.
15
GETTING STARTED
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO — PASSIVE ENTRY
Introduction To Keyless Enter-N-Go
The Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the vehicle’s key
fob. This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) and trunk without
having to push the key fob lock or unlock buttons as well as starting and stopping the
vehicle with the push of a button.
To Unlock From The Driver Or Passenger Side:
• With a valid Keyless Enter-N-Go key fob
located outside the vehicle and within
5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger
side door handle, grab either front door
handle to unlock the door automatically.
To Lock The Vehicle:
• Both front door handles have buttons
located on the outside of the handle.
With one of the vehicle's Keyless EnterN-Go key fobs located outside the vehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
driver's or passenger front door handle,
push the door handle button to lock all
four doors and trunk.
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
• Do NOT grab the door handle, when pushing the door handle button. This could unlock
the door(s).
Push The Button To Lock
Do NOT Grab The Handle When Locking
NOTE:
• If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed, all doors will unlock when you grab hold
of the front driver's door handle. To select between “Unlock Driver Door 1st Press” and
“Unlock All Doors 1st Press,” refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in the Owner’s
Manual on www.dodge.com/en/owners/manuals or “Programmable Features” in this
guide for further information.
16
GETTING STARTED
• If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed, all doors and trunk will unlock when
you push the trunk button. To select between “Unlock Driver Door 1st Press” and
“Unlock All Doors 1st Press,” refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in the Owner’s
Manual on www.dodge.com/en/owners/manuals or “Programmable Features” in this
guide for further information.
• If a key fob is detected in the vehicle when locking the vehicle using the power door
lock switch, the doors and trunk will unlock, and the horn will chirp three times. On the
third attempt, your key fob can be locked inside the vehicle.
• After pushing the Keyless Enter-N-Go lock button, you must wait two seconds before
you can lock or unlock the vehicle using the door handle. This is done to allow you to
check if the vehicle is locked by pulling the door handle without the vehicle reacting
and unlocking.
• If a Keyless Enter-N-Go door handle has not been used for 72 hours, the Keyless
Enter-N-Go feature for that handle may time out. Pulling the deactivated front door
handle will reactivate the door handle's Keyless Enter-N-Go feature.
To Enter The Trunk:
• With a valid Keyless Enter-N-Go key fob
located outside the vehicle and within
5 ft (1.5 m) of the deck lid, push the
button located on the center of the light
bar which is located on the deck lid
above the license plate.
Trunk Release Button
NOTE:
Refer to the Owner’s Manual at www.dodge.com/en/owners/manuals for further
information.
17
GETTING STARTED
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO — IGNITION
NOTE:
In case the ignition switch does not change with the push of a button, the key fob may
have a low or dead battery. In this situation, a back up method can be used to operate the
ignition switch. Put the nose side of the key fob (side opposite of the Emergency Key)
against the ENGINE START/STOP button and push to operate the ignition switch.
Accessory Positions With Engine Off
NOTE:
The following functions are with the driver’s foot OFF the Brake Pedal/Clutch Pedal
(Transmission in PARK or NEUTRAL Position).
Starting With The Ignition Switch In The
OFF Position:
• Push the ENGINE START/STOP button
once to change the ignition switch to the
ACC position.
Accessory Positions
• Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a
second time to change the ignition switch to the RUN position.
• Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time to return the ignition switch to the
OFF position.
Engine Starting/Stopping — Automatic Transmission
Starting
• Place the gear selector in PARK or NEUTRAL.
• Press and hold the brake pedal, then
push the ENGINE START/STOP button
once. If the engine fails to start, the
starter will disengage automatically after
10 seconds.
• To stop the cranking of the engine prior
to the engine starting, push the button
again.
Start/Stop Button
18
GETTING STARTED
Stopping
1. Place the gear selector in PARK.
2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once. The ignition switch will return to the
OFF position.
If the gear selector is not in PARK, the ENGINE START/STOP button must be held for two
seconds and vehicle speed must be above 5 mph (8 km/h) before the engine will shut off.
NOTE:
If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN (engine not running) position and the
transmission is in PARK, the system will automatically time out after 30 minutes of
inactivity and the ignition will switch to the OFF position.
Engine Starting/Stopping — Manual Transmission
Starting
• Push and hold the clutch pedal while pushing and holding the ENGINE START/STOP
button. Release the button when the engine starts. If the engine fails to start within
15 seconds, release the button, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat.
• To stop the cranking of the engine prior to the engine starting, release the button.
Stopping
• With the vehicle stopped, place the gear selector in NEUTRAL.
• Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once. The ignition switch will return to the
OFF position.
• If the vehicle speed is above 5 mph (8 km/h), the ENGINE START/STOP button must be
held for two seconds before the engine will shut off. The ignition switch position will
remain in the ACC position until the vehicle is stopped and the button is pushed twice
to the OFF position.
NOTE:
If the ignition switch is left in the ACC position, the system will automatically time out
after 60 minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the OFF position.
19
GETTING STARTED
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM
The vehicle security alarm monitors the vehicle doors for unauthorized entry and the
ignition for unauthorized operation. While the vehicle security alarm is armed, interior
switches for door locks and trunk release are disabled. If something triggers the alarm, the
vehicle security alarm will provide the following audible and visible signals: the horn will
pulse, the park lamps and/or turn signals will flash, and the vehicle security light in the
instrument cluster will flash.
To Arm
Push the Keyless Enter-N-Go START/STOP button until the instrument cluster display
indicates that the vehicle ignition is “OFF.” Push the power door lock switch while the door
is open, push the key fob lock button, or with one of the key fobs located outside the
vehicle, and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver's and passenger front door handles, push the
Keyless Enter-N-Go lock button located on the door handle.
NOTE:
After pushing the Keyless Enter-N-Go lock button, you must wait two seconds before you
can lock or unlock the vehicle via the door handle.
To Disarm
Push the key fob unlock button or with one of the key fobs located outside the vehicle and
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver's and passenger front door handles, grab the Keyless
Enter-N-Go door handle and enter the vehicle, then push the Keyless Enter-N-Go
START/STOP button (requires at least one valid key fob in the vehicle).
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems:
Occupant Restraint Systems Features
• Seat Belt Systems
• Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
• Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in this section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask your authorized
dealer.
20
GETTING STARTED
Important Safety Precautions
Please pay close attention to the information in this section. It tells you how to use your
restraint system properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air
bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride buckled up in a vehicle with a rear
seat.
2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing child restraint) must ride in the
front passenger seat, move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child
restraint (refer to “Child Restraints” in this section for further information).
3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly (refer to “Child
Restraints” in this section for further information) should be secured in a vehicle with
a rear seat in child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats. Older children who do
not use child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled
up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that
you are using it properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow
the front air bags room to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your vehicle has side air bags, and
deployment occurs, the side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space between
occupants and the door and occupants could be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled
person, refer to the “Consumer Assistance” section for customer service contact
information.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat.
Seat Belt Systems
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even on short trips. Someone on the
road may be a poor driver and could cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
21
GETTING STARTED
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they can reduce the seriousness of
injuries in a collision. Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the
vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by
striking the inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System (BeltAlert)
Driver And Passenger BeltAlert — If Equipped
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver and outboard front seat passenger
(if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The
Belt Alert feature is active whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN
position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in the START or ON/RUN
position, a chime will signal for a few seconds. If the driver or outboard front seat
passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled when
the ignition switch is first in the START or ON/RUN position the Seat Belt Reminder Light
will turn on and remain on until both outboard front seat belts are buckled. The outboard
front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when an outboard front passenger seat is
unoccupied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the vehicle is moving above a specified
vehicle speed range and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is unbuckled (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) (the outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert is not active when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied). The
BeltAlert warning sequence starts by blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding
an intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence has completed, the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will remain on until the seat belts are buckled. The BeltAlert warning
sequence may repeat based on vehicle speed until the driver and occupied outboard front
seat passenger seat belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all occupants to buckle
their seat belts.
Change Of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger
seat BeltAlert) unbuckles their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert
warning sequence will begin until the seat belts are buckled again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the outboard front
passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or other items
are placed on the outboard front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if
equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly stowed.
22
GETTING STARTED
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by your authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not
recommend deactivating BeltAlert.
NOTE:
If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until the driver and outboard front seat
passenger seat belts are buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very sudden stops or collisions. This
feature allows the shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely with you under normal
conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking
the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision. The air
bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, the air bags
won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even though you have air bags.
• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not
properly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers,
or you can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your vehicle
are buckled up properly.
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly.
Occupants, including the driver, should always wear their seat belts whether or not an
air bag is also provided at their seating position to minimize the risk of severe injury
or death in the event of a crash.
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your injuries in a collision much worse.
You might suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the seat belt. Follow
these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt. People belted together can
crash into one another in a collision, hurting one another badly. Never use a
lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person, no matter what their size.
23
GETTING STARTED
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of injury in a collision. The seat belt
forces won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your abdomen. Always
wear the lap part of your seat belt as low as possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In a collision, it could even cut into
you. Be sure the seat belt is flat against your body, without twists. If you can’t
straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer immediately
and have it fixed.
• A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly. The lap
portion could ride too high on your body, possibly causing internal injuries. Always
buckle your seat belt into the buckle nearest you.
• A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you properly. In a sudden stop, you could
move too far forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly.
• A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous. Your body could strike the inside
surfaces of the vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck injury. A seat belt
worn under the arm can cause internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the
force in a collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during a collision.
You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt.
The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together.
• A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no
protection. Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose
parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify
the seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision.
24
GETTING STARTED
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front seat, and next to your arm in the
rear seat (for vehicles equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and pull out the
seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt
to go around your lap.
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit,
insert the latch plate into the buckle
until you hear a “click.”
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug
and lies low across your hips, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap
belt portion, pull up on the shoulder
belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too
tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the
lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the
risk of sliding under the seat belt in a
collision.
5. Position the shoulder belt across the
shoulder and chest with minimal, if any
slack so that it is comfortable and not
resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
1 — Seat Belt Buckle
2 — Seat Belt
6. To release the seat belt, push the red
button on the buckle. The seat belt will
automatically retract to its stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the
webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate, grasp and twist the seat
belt webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch
plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing. The folded webbing must enter
the slot at the top of the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded webbing and the seat belt
is no longer twisted.
25
GETTING STARTED
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when the webbing is fully extended
and the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest position,
your authorized dealer can provide you with a Seat Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender
should be used only if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the Seat Belt
Extender is not required for a different occupant, it must be removed.
WARNING!
• ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically required in order to properly fit the
original seat belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender if, when worn, the
distance between the front edge of the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of
the occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
• Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can increase the risk of serious injury
or death in a collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the lap belt is not long
enough and only use in the recommended seating positions. Remove and store the
Seat Belt Extender when not needed.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants
including pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of an accident is reduced
for the mother and the unborn child if they
are wearing a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the
abdomen and across the strong bones of
the hips. Place the shoulder belt across the
chest and away from the neck. Never place
the shoulder belt behind the back or under
the arm.
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision. These devices may improve the
performance of the seat belt by removing slack from the seat belt early in a collision.
Pretensioners work for all size occupants, including those in child restraints.
NOTE:
These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant. The
seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly.
26
GETTING STARTED
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air
bags, the pretensioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air
bag must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
The front seat belt system is equipped with an Energy Management feature that may help
further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a collision. The seat belt system has a
retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with a Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system. For
additional information, refer to “Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt”
under the “Child Restraints” section of this manual. The figure below illustrates the
locking feature for each seating position.
If the passenger seating position is
equipped with an ALR and is being used for
normal usage, only pull the seat belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap
around the occupant’s mid-section so as to
not activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound as the
seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to
retract completely in this case and then
carefully pull out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around
the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a "click."
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking
belt is automatically pre-locked. The seat
Retractor
belt will still retract to remove any slack in
the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is installed
in a seating position that has a seat belt with this feature. Children 12 years old and under
should always be properly restrained in a vehicle with a rear seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat.
27
GETTING STARTED
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts, you will hear a clicking sound.
This indicates the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to
disengage the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
WARNING!
• The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not working properly when
checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
• Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain occupants who are wearing the
seat belt or children who are using booster seats. The locked mode is only used to
install rear-facing or forward-facing child restraints that have a harness for restraining
the child.
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS)
Some of the safety features described in this section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask your authorized
dealer.
The air bag system must be ready to protect you in a collision. The Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated with
the electrical Air Bag System Components. Your vehicle may be equipped with the
following Air Bag System Components:
Air Bag System Components
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
28
GETTING STARTED
• Seat Track Position Sensors
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Air Bag Warning Light
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the air bag system
whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN position. If the ignition switch is
in the OFF position or in the ACC position, the air bag system is not on and the air bags will
not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may deploy the air bag system even
if the battery loses power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument panel for approximately
four to eight seconds for a self-check when the ignition switch is first in the ON/RUN
position. After the self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects
a malfunction in any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either
momentarily or continuously. A single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes on
again after initial startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instrument panel Air Bag
Warning Light if a malfunction is detected that could affect the air bag system. The
diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction. While the air bag system is designed
to be maintenance free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service
the air bag system immediately.
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the four to eight seconds when the
ignition switch is first in the ON/RUN position.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to eight-second interval.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving.
NOTE:
If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine related gauges are not working, the
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition the air bags
may not be ready to inflate for your protection. Have an authorized dealer service the air
bag system immediately.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have
the air bag system to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on as a bulb
check when the ignition is first turned on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it
comes on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately.
29
GETTING STARTED
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is detected, which could affect the Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS), the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will illuminate on the
instrument panel. The Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will stay on until the fault is
cleared. In addition, a single chime will sound to alert you that the Redundant Air Bag
Warning Light has come on and a fault has been detected. If the Redundant Air Bag
Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving have an authorized
dealer service the vehicle immediately. For additional information regarding the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light, refer to “Warning/Indicator Lights And Messages” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” in the Owner’s Manual on
www.dodge.com/en/owners/manuals.
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder belts for both the driver and front
passenger. The front air bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. The
driver front air bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The passenger front air
bag is mounted in the instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The words “SRS
AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on the air bag covers.
Front Air Bag/Knee Impact Bolster Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
2 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster
3 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster
WARNING!
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during front air bag
deployment could cause serious injury, including death. Air bags need room to
inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
30
GETTING STARTED
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat.
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver and front passenger air bags.
This system provides output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as determined
by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which may receive information from the front
impact sensors (if equipped) or other system components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an impact that requires air bag
deployment. A low energy output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy output
is used for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front passenger seat belt buckle switch
that detects whether the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat belt
buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front passenger seat track position
sensors that may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon seat
position.
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near the air bag on the instrument panel or
steering wheel because any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a
collision severe enough to cause the air bag to inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers or attempt to open them
manually. You may damage the air bags and you could be injured because the air
bags may no longer be functional. The protective covers for the air bag cushions are
designed to open only when the air bags are inflating.
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision. The air
bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, air bags
won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts even though you have air bags.
31
GETTING STARTED
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protection by supplementing the seat
belts. Front air bags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover
collisions. The front air bags will not deploy in all frontal collisions, including some that
may produce substantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions, truck
underrides, and angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and location of impact, front air bags may
deploy in crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe initial
deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over time, vehicle speed and
damage by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have
deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all collisions, and also are needed to help
keep you in position, away from an inflating air bag.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the front air bags, it signals the inflator units.
A large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the front air bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel
separate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The front air bags
fully inflate in less time than it takes to blink your eyes. The front air bags then quickly
deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and front passenger, and
position the front occupants for improved interaction with the front air bags.
WARNING!
• Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact bolsters in any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact bolsters such as alarm lights,
stereos, citizen band radios, etc.
32
GETTING STARTED
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Your vehicle is equipped with two types of side air bags:
1. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs): Located in the outboard side of the
front seats. The SABs are marked with a “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” label sewn into the
outboard side of the seats.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of
occupant injury during certain side impacts and/or vehicle rollover events, in
addition to the injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body
structure.
When the SAB deploys, it opens the
seam on the outboard side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating SAB
deploys through the seat seam into the
space between the occupant and the
door. The SAB moves at a very high
speed and with such a high force that it
could injure occupants if they are not
seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the SAB inflates. Children are at an even greater
risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air
Bag Label
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the Side Air Bags;
the performance could be adversely affected and/or objects could be pushed into you,
causing serious injury.
33
GETTING STARTED
2. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs): Located above the side
windows. The trim covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.”
SABICs may help reduce the risk of
head or other injuries to front and rear
seat outboard occupants in certain side
impacts and/or vehicle rollover events,
in addition to the injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and
body structure.
The SABICs deploy downward, covering
the side windows. An inflating SABIC
pushes the outside edge of the trim out
of the way and covers the window. The
SABICs inflate with enough force to
injure occupants if they are not belted
and seated properly, or if items are
positioned in the area where the
SABICs inflate. Children are at an even
greater risk of injury from a deploying
air bag.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) Label Location
WARNING!
• Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the
deployment of the SABICs. The trim covering above the side windows where the
SABIC and its deployment path are located should remain free from any obstructions.
• In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do not install any accessory items in your
vehicle which could alter the roof. Do not add an aftermarket sunroof to your vehicle.
Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for
installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle for any reason.
The SABICs and SABs (Side Air Bags) are designed to activate in certain side impacts and
certain rollover events. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines whether the
deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular side impact or rollover event is appropriate,
based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indicator
of whether or not Side Air Bags should have deployed.
34
GETTING STARTED
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in
less time than it takes to blink your eyes.
WARNING!
• Occupants, including children, who are up against or very close to Side Air Bags can
be seriously injured or killed. Occupants, including children, should never lean on or
sleep against the door, side windows, or area where the side air bags inflate, even if
they are in an infant or child restraint.
• Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate) are necessary for your protection
in all collisions. They also help keep you in position, away from an inflating Side Air
Bag. To get the best protection from the Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their
seat belts properly and sit upright with their backs against the seats. Children must
be properly restrained in a child restraint or booster seat that is appropriate for the
size of the child.
WARNING!
• Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean against the door or window.
Sit upright in the center of the seat.
• Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deployment could cause you to be
severely injured or killed.
• Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision.
The Side Air Bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions,
Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even though you have
Side Air Bags.
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, but they will open during air bag
deployment.
Side Impacts
In side impacts, the side impact sensors aid the ORC in determining the appropriate
response to impact events. The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on the
impact side of the vehicle during impacts that require Side Air Bag occupant protection.
In side impacts, the Side Air Bags deploy independently; a left side impact deploys the
left Side Air Bags only and a right side impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions, including some collisions at certain
angles, or some side collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger compartment.
The Side Air Bags may deploy during angled or offset frontal collisions where the front air
bags deploy.
35
GETTING STARTED
Rollover Events
Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain rollover events. The ORC determines
whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular rollover event is appropriate,
based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indicator
of whether or not Side Air Bags should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all rollover events. The rollover sensing system
determines if a rollover event may be in progress and whether deployment is appropriate.
In the event the vehicle experiences a rollover or near rollover event, and deployment of
the Side Air Bags is appropriate, the rollover sensing system will also deploy the seat belt
pretensioners on both sides of the vehicle.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete ejection of vehicle occupants
through side windows in certain rollover or side impact events.
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated with electrical Air Bag System Components listed below:
Air Bag System Components
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Seat Track Position Sensors
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
36
GETTING STARTED
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate immediately after deployment.
NOTE:
Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all collisions. This does not mean something
is wrong with the air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any or all of the following may occur:
• The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions and/or skin reddening to the
occupants as the air bags deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction rope
burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not
caused by contact with chemicals. They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a few days, or if you have any
blistering, see your doctor immediately.
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like particles. The particles are a
normal by-product of the process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air bag
inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you
have skin or eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat irritation,
move to fresh air. If the irritation continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deployed. If you are involved in another
collision, the air bags will not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision.
Have the air bags, seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor assemblies
replaced by an authorized dealer immediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint
Controller System serviced as well.
NOTE:
• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, but they will open during air bag
deployment.
• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an authorized dealer immediately.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication network remains intact, and the power
remains intact, depending on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine whether to
have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the following functions:
• Cut off fuel to the engine.
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or until the hazard light button is
pressed. The hazard lights can be deactivated by pressing the hazard light button.
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as the battery has power.
• Unlock the power door locks.
37
GETTING STARTED
Enhanced Accident Response System Reset Procedure
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System functions after an event, the
ignition switch must be changed from ignition START or ON/RUN to ignition OFF.
Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compartment and on the ground
near the engine compartment and fuel tank before resetting the system and starting the
engine.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system could cause it to fail when you need
it. You could be injured if the air bag system is not there to protect you. Do not modify
the components or wiring, including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the
steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or add aftermarket side steps or
running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell
anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag system. The air bag may inflate
accidentally or may not function properly if modifications are made. Take your
vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air bag system service. If your seat, including
your trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any way (including removal or
loosening/tightening of seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your authorized
dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary
to modify the air bag system for persons with disabilities, contact your authorized
dealer.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR
is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment
or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems
performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety
systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is
designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes
and injuries occur.
38
GETTING STARTED
NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data
are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g.,
name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law
enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data
routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle
or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law
enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have
access to the vehicle or the EDR.
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all times, including babies and
children. Every state in the United States, and every Canadian province, requires that
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the law, and you can be prosecuted
for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat, if available.
According to crash statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats
rather than in the front.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a projectile inside the vehicle. The
force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so great that you could
not hold the child, no matter how strong you are. The child and others could be badly
injured or killed. Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the
child’s size.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child
almost large enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child seat Owner’s Manual
to make sure you have the correct seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the
instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s Manual and on all the labels
attached to the child restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets
all applicable Safety Standards. You should also make sure that you can install it in the
vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
• For additional information, refer to www.safercar.gov/parents/index.htm or call:
1–888–327–4236.
• Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s website for additional
information:
http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm
39
GETTING STARTED
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Infants and Toddlers
Small Children
Larger Children
Children Too Large for
Child Restraints
Child Size, Height,
Recommended Type of Child
Weight or Age
Restraint
Children who are two years
Either an Infant Carrier or a
old or younger and who have
Convertible Child Restraint,
not reached the height or
facing rearward in the rear
weight limits of their
seat of the vehicle
child restraint
Children who are at least two
Forward-Facing Child Reyears old or who have outstraint with a five-point Hargrown the height or weight
ness, facing forward in the
limit of their rear-facing
rear seat of the vehicle
child restraint
Children who have out-grown
Belt Positioning Booster
their forward-facing child
Seat and the vehicle seat
restraint, but are too small
belt, seated in the rear seat
to properly fit the vehicle’s
of the vehicle
seat belt
Children 12 years old or
younger, who have out-grown Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in
the height or weight limit of
the rear seat of the vehicle
their booster seat
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing in the vehicle until they are two
years old or until they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child
restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used rear-facing: infant carriers and
convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle. It is recommended for children
from birth until they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier. Convertible child
seats can be used either rear-facing or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child
seats often have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing direction than infant carriers do,
so they can be used rear-facing by children who have outgrown their infant carrier but are
still less than at least two years old. Children should remain rear-facing until they reach the
highest weight or height allowed by their convertible child seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat.
40
GETTING STARTED
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown their rear-facing convertible child
seat can ride forward-facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible
child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children who are over two years old
or who have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of their rear-facing convertible
child seat. Children should remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for as long
as possible, up to the highest weight or height allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the forward-facing limit for the child seat
should use a belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts fit properly. If the
child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is
against the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The child and
belt-positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the seat belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint. It could come
loose in a collision. The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the child
restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat forward
or rearward because it can loosen the child restraint attachments. Remove the child
restraint before adjusting the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has been
adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or
LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle.
In a sudden stop or accident, it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause
serious personal injury.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are
long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback,
should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step test to decide whether the
child can use the vehicle’s seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front of the vehicle seat – while they are
still sitting all the way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder between their neck and arm?
41
GETTING STARTED
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching the child’s thighs and not their
stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the child still needs to use a booster
seat in this vehicle. If the child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit
periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched. A child’s squirming or
slouching can move the belt out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck,
move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use a booster seat to position the seat
belt on the child correctly.
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back. In a
crash, the shoulder belt will not protect a child properly, which may result in serious
injury or death. A child must always wear both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat
belt correctly.
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint
Type
Rear-Facing
Child
Restraint
Rear-Facing
Child
Restraint
ForwardFacing Child
Restraint
ForwardFacing Child
Restraint
42
Combined
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
Weight of the
LATCH –
Seat Belt
LATCH –
Seat Belt +
Child + Child
Lower
Only
Lower AnTop Tether
Restraint
Anchors Only
chors + Top
Anchor
Tether
Anchor
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
X
More than
65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than
65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
X
X
X
GETTING STARTED
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren (LATCH) Restraint System
Your vehicle is equipped with the child
restraint anchorage system called LATCH,
which stands for Lower Anchors and Tethers
for CHildren. The LATCH system has three
vehicle anchor points for installing LATCHequipped child seats. There are two lower
anchorages located at the back of the seat
cushion where it meets the seatback and
LATCH Label
one top tether anchorage located behind
the seating position. These anchorages are
used to install LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some
seating positions may have a top tether anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these
seating positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether anchorage to install the
child restraint. Please see the following table for more information.
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In This Vehicle
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In This Vehicle
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
43
GETTING STARTED
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
Use the LATCH anchorage
system until the combined
What is the weight limit
weight of the child and the
(child’s weight + weight of
child restraint is 65 lbs
the child restraint) for using
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
(29.5 kg). Use the seat belt
the LATCH anchorage sysand tether anchor instead of
tem to attach the child rethe LATCH system once the
straint?
combined weight is more
than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Do not use the seat belt
when you use the LATCH
anchorage system to attach
a rear-facing or forwardCan the LATCH anchorages
facing child restraint.
and the seat belt be used
Booster seats may be attogether to attach a rearNo
tached to the LATCH anchorfacing or forward-facing
ages if allowed by the
child restraint?
booster seat manufacturer.
See your booster seat owner’s manual for more information.
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more
child restraints. If the center
position does not have dedicated LATCH lower anchorCan two child restraints be
attached using a common
No
ages, use the seat belt to
lower LATCH anchorage?
install a child seat in the
center position next to a
child seat using the LATCH
anchorages in an outboard
position.
The child seat may touch
the back of the front passenCan the rear-facing child
ger seat if the child restraint
restraint touch the back of
Yes
manufacturer also allows
the front passenger seat?
contact. See your child restraint owner’s manual for
more information.
Can the head restraints be
No
removed?
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are found at the rear of the seat cushion
where it meets the seatback, below the anchorage symbols on the seatback. They are just
visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint. You will easily feel
them if you run your finger along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion.
44
GETTING STARTED
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
There are tether strap anchorages behind each rear seating position located in
the panel between the rear seatback and
the rear window. They are found under a
plastic cover with the tether anchorage
symbol on it.
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems
will be equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible
strap on each side. Each will have a hook or
connector to attach to the lower anchorage
and a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints
and some rear-facing child restraints will
also be equipped with a tether strap. The
tether strap will have a hook at the end to
attach to the top tether anchorage and a
way to tighten the strap after it is attached
to the anchorage.
LATCH Anchorages
Tether Strap Anchorages
Center Seat LATCH
If a child restraint installed in the center position blocks the seat belt webbing or buckle
for the outboard position, do not use that outboard position. If a child seat in the center
position blocks the outboard LATCH anchors or seat belt, do not install a child seat in that
outboard position.
WARNING!
Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more than one child restraint. Please
refer to “To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint” for typical installation
instructions.
Always follow the directions of the child restraint manufacturer when installing your child
restraint. Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here.
45
GETTING STARTED
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
If the selected seating position has a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat
belt, stow the seat belt, following the instructions below. See the section “Installing Child
Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” to check what type of seat belt each seating
position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap of the child seat so that
you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for that seating position. For some
second row seats, you may need to recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get
a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may
wish to move it to its rear-most position to make room for the child seat. You may also
move the front seat forward to allow more room for the child seat.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child restraint to the lower anchorages in
the selected seating position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the top tether anchorage. See the
section “Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to
attach a tether anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the
seat. Remove slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child
seat at the belt path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR (ALR) Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts
that are not being used by other occupants or being used to secure child restraints. An
unused belt could injure a child if they play with it and accidentally lock the seat belt
retractor. Before installing a child restraint using the LATCH system, buckle the seat belt
behind the child restraint and out of the child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes
with the child restraint installation, instead of buckling it behind the child restraint, route
the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock the seat
belt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and that they should
not play with them.
WARNING!
• Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure
of the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the child restraint
manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by
correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult
seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.
46
GETTING STARTED
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap
belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation or failure to properly secure a child restraint can lead to failure
of the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed.
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant
or child restraint.
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with a Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt
tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR
retractor can be “switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the webbing out of the
retractor and then letting the webbing retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the
ALR will make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into the retractor. Refer
to the “Automatic Locking Mode” description in “Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)” under “Occupant Restraint Systems” for additional information on ALR.
Please see the table below and the following sections for more information.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child Restraints In This Vehicle
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
47
GETTING STARTED
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit
Always use the tether anchor
(child’s weight + weight of
when using the seat belt to
the child restraint) for using
Weight limit of the
install a forward facing child
the Tether Anchor with the
Child Restraint
restraint, up to the recomseat belt to attach a forward
mended weight limit of the
facing child restraint?
child restraint.
Contact between the front
Can the rear-facing child
passenger seat and the child
restraint touch the back of
Yes
restraint is allowed, if the
the front passenger seat?
child restraint manufacturer
also allows contact.
Can the head restraints be
No
removed?
Can the buckle stalk be
Do not twist the buckle stalk
twisted to tighten the seat
No
in a seating position with an
belt against the belt path of
ALR retractor.
the child restraint?
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the
lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation or failure to properly secure a child restraint can lead to failure
of the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed.
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant
or child restraint.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating position. For some second row seats,
you may need to recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a better fit. If the
rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it
to its rear-most position to make room for the child seat. You may also move the front
seat forward to allow more room for the child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to pass it through the belt path
of the child restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight against the child seat.
48
GETTING STARTED
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of the belt until you have pulled
all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract back
into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This means
the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is locked, you should not be able to pull
out any webbing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child
restraint while you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle
seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the seating position has a top tether
anchorage, connect the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether strap. See
the section “Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions
to attach a tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child
seat at the belt path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight
if necessary.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether Anchorage
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat to any location in front of the car
seat, including the seat frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the tether strap of a
rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage that is approved for that seating position,
located behind the top of the vehicle seat. See the section “Lower Anchors and Tethers
for CHildren (LATCH) Restraint System” for the location of approved tether anchorages
in your vehicle.
1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to install the child restraint to find the
tether anchorage. You may need to move the seat forward to provide better access to
the tether anchorage. If there is no top tether anchorage for that seating position, move
the child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one is available.
49
GETTING STARTED
2. Rotate or lift the cover to access the anchor directly behind the seat where you are
placing the child restraint.
3. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for the strap between the anchor
and the child seat. If your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head restraints,
raise the head restraint, and where possible, route the tether strap under the head
restraint and between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head restraint and pass
the tether strap around the outboard side of the head restraint.
4. Attach the tether strap hook of the child
restraint to the top tether anchorage as
shown in the diagram.
5. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions.
Tether Strap Attachment
1 — Cover
3 — Attaching Strap
A — Tether Strap Hook
B — Tether Anchor
WARNING!
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and
possible injury to the child. Use only the anchorage position directly behind the child
seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat, make sure the tether strap does not
slip into the opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in the strap.
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet. An unrestrained pet will be
thrown about and possibly injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a
collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured
by seat belts.
50
GETTING STARTED
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by restricting head movement in
the event of a rear impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the head
restraint is located above the top of your ear.
WARNING!
• All occupants, including the driver, should not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s
seat until the head restraints are placed in their proper positions in order to minimize
the risk of neck injury in the event of a crash.
• Head restraints should never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted or removed could cause serious
injury or death in the event of a collision.
NOTE:
Do not reverse the head restraints (making the rear of the head restraint face forward) in
an attempt to gain additional clearance to the back of your head.
Reactive Head Restraints — Front Seats
The front driver and passenger seats are equipped with Reactive Head Restraints (RHR).
In the event of a rear impact, the RHRs will automatically extend forward minimizing the
gap between the back of the occupants head and the RHR.
The RHRs will automatically return to their normal position following a rear impact. If the
RHRs do not return to their normal position, see your authorized dealer immediately.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on
the head restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment button located
at the base of the head restraint and push
downward on the head restraint.
To remove the head restraint, remove the
seat belt from the seat belt loop. Raise the
head restraint as far as it can go. Then, push
the adjustment button and the release button at the base of each post while pulling
the head restraint up. To reinstall the head
restraint, put the head restraint posts into
the holes while pushing the adjustment
button and release button. Then, adjust it to
the appropriate height.
Adjustment Button
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
51
GETTING STARTED
WARNING!
• A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could cause serious
injury or death to occupants of the vehicle. Always securely stow removed head
restraints in a location outside the occupant compartment.
• ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the vehicle to properly protect the
occupants. Follow the re-installation instructions above prior to operating the vehicle
or occupying a seat.
• Do not place items over the top of the Reactive Head Restraint, such as coats, seat
covers or portable DVD players. These items may interfere with the operation of the
Reactive Head Restraint in the event of a collision and could result in serious injury
or death.
SEATING
Power Seats
The power seat switches are located on the outboard side of the front seat cushions. The
power seat switches are used to control the position of the seat.
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and
rearward. Push the seat switch forward or
rearward. The seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch when
the desired position has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up
or down. Pull upward or push downward on
the seat switch. The seat will move in the
direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position is reached.
Power Seat Switch
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four directions. Pull upward or push
downward on the front or rear of the seat switch, the front or rear of the seat cushion will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the desired position is
reached.
52
GETTING STARTED
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats are also equipped with power
lumbar. The power lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the power seat. Push
the switch forward to increase the lumbar support. Push the switch rearward to decrease
the lumbar support. Pushing upward or downward on the switch will raise and lower the
position of the support.
Power Lumbar Switch
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could
result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is
parked. Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting
against your chest. In a collision, you could slide under the seat belt, which could
result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or impede its ability to move as it may cause
damage to the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if movement is stopped
by an obstruction in the seat’s path.
53
GETTING STARTED
HEATED/VENTILATED SEATS
Front Heated Seats
If your vehicle is equipped with front heated seats, the control buttons are located within
the Uconnect system. You can gain access to the control buttons through the climate
screen or the controls screen.
• Press the heated seat button
once to turn the HI setting on.
• Press the heated seat button
a second time to turn the LO setting on.
• Press the heated seat button
a third time to turn the heating elements off.
If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will automatically switch to LO-level after
approximately 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the display will change
from HI to LO, indicating the change. The LO-level setting will turn off automatically after
approximately 45 minutes.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated seats to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the heated seats can be programmed to
come on during a remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” in the Owner’s Manual on
www.dodge.com/en/owners/manuals for further information.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age, chronic
illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other
physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods of time
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that insulates against heat, such as a
blanket or cushion. This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat that
has been overheated could cause serious burns due to the increased surface
temperature of the seat.
54
GETTING STARTED
FRONT VENTILATED SEATS
If your vehicle is equipped with ventilated seats, the seat cushion and seat back will have
fans that draw the air from the passenger compartment and move air through fine
perforations in the seat cover to help keep the driver and front passenger cooler in higher
ambient temperatures. The fans operate at two speeds: HI and LO.
The front ventilated seats control buttons are located within the Uconnect system. You
can gain access to the control buttons through the climate screen or the controls screen.
• Press the ventilated seat button
once to choose HI.
• Press the ventilated seat button
a second time to choose LO.
• Press the ventilated seat button
a third time to turn the ventilated seat off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the ventilated seats to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the driver’s ventilated seat can be
programmed to come on during a remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” in your Owner’s Manual at
www.dodge.com/en/owners/manuals for further details.
55
GETTING STARTED
REAR SEAT
Folding Rear Seat
The rear seatbacks can be folded forward to provide an additional storage area. Pull on the
loops located on the upper part of the rear seatback to fold down either or both seatbacks.
These loops can be tucked away when not in use.
NOTE:
You may experience deformation in the seat cushion from the seat belt buckles if the seats
are left folded for an extended period of time. This is normal and, by simply opening the
seats to the open position, over time the seat cushion will return to its normal shape.
When the seatback is folded to the upright
position, make sure it is latched by strongly
pulling on the top of the seatback above the
seat strap.
Folding Rear Seatback Loop
WARNING!
• Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into position. If the seatback is not
securely locked into position, the seat will not provide the proper stability for child
seats and/or passengers. An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury.
• The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the rear seatbacks in the locked-up or
folded down position) should not be used as a play area by children when the vehicle
is in motion. They could be seriously injured in a collision. Children should be seated
and using the proper restraint system.
56
GETTING STARTED
Manual Seat Adjustment
Manual Forward Or Rearward Adjustment
The adjusting bar is located at the front of the seat, near the floor. Pull the bar upward to
move the seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once the seat is in the desired position.
Using body pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat
adjusters have latched.
Adjusting Bar Location
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous. The sudden movement of the
seat could cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be properly adjusted and
you could be injured. Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
57
GETTING STARTED
Manual Front Seatback Recline
To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the outboard side of the seat, lean back to
the desired position and release the lever. To return the seatback, lift the lever, lean
forward and release the lever.
Recliner Handle
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting
against your chest. In a collision, you could slide under the seat belt, which could result
in serious injury or death.
58
GETTING STARTED
Passenger Seat Easy Entry
On the passenger seat, pull forward on the lever located on the side of the seatback in
order to dump the seatback and slide the seat forward. You can also temporarily remove
the seat belt from the guide loop on the seat and allow the seat belt to retract out of the
way. This allows for easier access to the rear seat. To return the seat to a normal seating
position, first return the seatback to its original recline location and then slide the entire
seat back to the pre-set lock position.
Easy Entry Seat Lever
59
GETTING STARTED
HEATED STEERING WHEEL
The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps warm your hands in cold
weather. The heated steering wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated
steering wheel has been turned on, it will stay on for an average of 80 minutes or more
before automatically shutting off. This time will vary based on environmental temperatures. The heated steering wheel can shut off early or may not turn on when the steering
wheel is already warm.
The heated steering wheel control button is located within the Uconnect system. You can
gain access to the control button through the climate screen or the controls screen.
• Press the heated steering wheel button
• Press the heated steering wheel button
off.
once to turn the heating element on.
a second time to turn the heating element
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated steering wheel to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the heated steering wheel can be
programmed to come on during a remote start through the Uconnect system. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” in the Owner’s Manual
on www.dodge.com/en/owners/manuals for further information.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age, chronic
illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other
physical conditions must exercise care when using the steering wheel heater. It may
cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods.
• Do not place anything on the steering wheel that insulates against heat, such as a
blanket or steering wheel covers of any type and material. This may cause the
steering wheel heater to overheat.
60
GETTING STARTED
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
Manual Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward. It also allows you
to lengthen or shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever is located below the
steering wheel at the end of the steering column.
To unlock the steering column, pull the
lever downward. To tilt the steering column,
move the steering wheel upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or shorten the
steering column, pull the steering wheel
outward or push it inward as desired. To
lock the steering column in position, push
the lever upward until fully engaged.
Manual Tilt/Telescoping Control Handle
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving. Adjusting the steering column while
driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause the driver to lose
control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or
death.
61
GETTING STARTED
Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward. It also allows you
to lengthen or shorten the steering column. The power tilt/telescoping steering column
lever is located below the multifunction lever on the steering column.
To tilt the steering column, move the lever
up or down as desired. To lengthen or
shorten the steering column, pull the lever
toward you or push the lever away from you
as desired.
Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Control
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving. Adjusting the steering column while
driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause the driver to lose
control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or
death.
62
O P E R AT I N G Y O U R V E H I C L E
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
3.6L Engine Break-In
For vehicles equipped with the 3.6L, use the following engine break-in recommendations:
A long break-in period is not required for the drivetrain (engine, transmission, clutch, and
rear axle) in your new vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km),
speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws
contributes to a good break-in. However, wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can
be detrimental and should be avoided.
The engine oil, transmission fluid, and axle lubricant installed at the factory is high-quality
and energy-conserving. Oil, fluid, and lubricant changes should be consistent with
anticipated climate and conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For the
recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” in this guide.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil in the engine or damage may
result.
NOTE:
A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles (kilometers) of
operation. This should be considered a normal part of the break-in and not interpreted as
an indication of difficulty. Please check your oil level with the engine oil indicator often
during the break in period. Add oil as required.
63
O P E R AT I N G Y O U R V E H I C L E
5.7L Engine Break-In
For vehicles equipped with the 5.7L, use the following engine break-in recommendations:
A long break-in period is not required for the drivetrain (engine, transmission, clutch, and
rear axle) in your new vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km),
speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws
contributes to a good break-in. However, wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can
be detrimental and should be avoided.
The engine oil, transmission fluid, and axle lubricant installed at the factory is high-quality
and energy-conserving. Oil, fluid, and lubricant changes should be consistent with
anticipated climate and conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For the
recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” in this guide.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil in the engine or damage may
result.
NOTE:
A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles (kilometers) of
operation. This should be considered a normal part of the break-in and not interpreted as
an indication of difficulty. Please check your oil level with the engine oil indicator often
during the break in period. Add oil as required.
6.4L Engine Break-In
For vehicles equipped with the 6.4L use the following engine break-in recommendations:
Despite modern technology and World Class manufacturing methods, the moving parts of
the vehicle must still wear in with each other. This wearing in occurs mainly during the first
500 miles (805 km) and continues through the first oil change interval.
It is recommended for the operator to observe the following driving behaviors during the
new vehicle break-in period:
0 to 100 miles (0 to 160 km):
• Do not allow the engine to operate at idle for an extended period of time.
• Press the accelerator pedal slowly and not more than halfway to avoid rapid acceleration.
• Avoid aggressive braking.
• Drive with the engine speed less than 3,500 RPM.
• Maintain vehicle speed below 55 mph (88 km/h) and observe local speed limits.
64
O P E R AT I N G Y O U R V E H I C L E
100 to 300 miles (160 to 483 km):
• Press the accelerator pedal slowly and not more than halfway to avoid rapid acceleration in lower gears (1st to 3rd gears).
• Avoid aggressive braking.
• Drive with the engine speed less than 5,000 RPM.
• Maintain vehicle speed below 70 mph (112 km/h) and observe local speed limits.
300 to 500 miles (483 to 805 km):
• Exercise the full engine rpm range, shifting manually (paddles or gear shift) at higher
rpms when possible.
• Do not perform sustained operation with the accelerator pedal at wide open throttle.
• Maintain vehicle speed below 85 mph (136 km/h) and observe local speed limits.
For the first 1500 miles (2414 km):
• Do not participate in track events, sport driving schools, or similar activities during the
first 1500 miles (2414 km).
NOTE:
Check engine oil with every refueling and add if necessary. Oil and fuel consumption may
be higher through the first oil change interval.
6.2L Engine Break-In
For vehicles equipped with the 6.2L SRT Engine, use the following engine break-in
recommendations. This procedure will be helpful in obtaining optimum performance and
maximum durability for your new SRT Vehicle.
Despite modern technology and World Class manufacturing methods, the moving parts of
the vehicle must still wear in with each other. This wearing in occurs mainly during the first
500 miles (805 km) and continues through the first oil change interval.
It is recommended for the operator to observe the following driving behaviors during the
new vehicle break-in period:
0 to 100 miles (0 to 160 km):
• Do not allow the engine to operate at idle for an extended period of time.
• Press the accelerator pedal slowly and not more than halfway to avoid rapid acceleration.
• Avoid aggressive braking.
• Drive with the engine speed less than 3,500 RPM.
• Maintain vehicle speed below 55 mph (88 km/h) and observe local speed limits.
100 to 300 miles (160 to 483 km):
• Press the accelerator pedal slowly and not more than halfway to avoid rapid acceleration in lower gears (1st to 3rd gears).
• Avoid aggressive braking.
65
O P E R AT I N G Y O U R V E H I C L E
• Drive with the engine speed less than 5,000 RPM.
• Maintain vehicle speed below 70 mph (112 km/h) and observe local speed limits.
300 to 500 miles (483 to 805 km):
• Exercise the full engine rpm range, shifting manually (paddles or gear shift) at higher
rpms when possible.
• Do not perform sustained operation with the accelerator pedal at wide open throttle.
• Maintain vehicle speed below 85 mph (136 km/h) and observe local speed limits.
For the first 1500 miles (2414 km):
• Do not participate in track events, sport driving schools, or similar activities during the
first 1500 miles (2414 km).
NOTE:
Check engine oil with every refueling and add if necessary. Oil and fuel consumption may
be higher through the first oil change interval.
TURN SIGNAL/WIPER/WASHER/HIGH BEAM LEVER
Turn Signal/Lane Change Assist
Tap the lever up or down once and the turn
signal (right or left) will flash three times.
Then, it will turn off automatically.
Front Wipers
Intermittent, Low And High Operation
Rotate the end of the lever to the first detent
position for one of four intermittent settings, the second detent for low wiper operation and the third detent for high wiper
operation.
Mist
Rotate the end of the lever downward when
a single wipe is desired.
Multifunction Lever
1 — Push For Washer
2 — Rotate Downward For Mist
3 — Push Lever For High Beams
NOTE:
The mist feature does not activate the washer pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be
sprayed on the windshield. The wash function must be activated in order to spray the
windshield with washer fluid.
66
O P E R AT I N G Y O U R V E H I C L E
Washer Operation
Push the end of the lever inward and hold for as long as spray is desired.
Rain Sensing Wipers
This feature senses moisture on the vehicle's windshield and automatically activates the
wipers for the driver when the switch is in the intermittent position. Rotate the end of the
lever to one of four settings to activate this feature and adjust sensitivity.
Rain Sensing can be turned on and off using the Uconnect System, refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” in your Owner’s Manual at
www.dodge.com/en/owners/manuals for further details.
High Beam Operation
Push the lever forward to activate the high beams. Pull the lever toward you for flash to
pass.
NOTE:
For safe driving, turn off the high beams when oncoming traffic is present to prevent
headlight glare and as a courtesy to other motorists.
HEADLIGHT SWITCH
Automatic Headlights/Parking Lights/Headlights
• Rotate the headlight switch, located on
the instrument panel to the left of the
steering wheel, to the first detent from
and
the off position for parking light
.
to the second detent for headlight
• With the parking lights or low beam
headlights on, push the headlight switch
for front fog lights. Pushing the switch a
second time will deactivate the front fog
lights. Turning the headlight switch off
will also deactivate the front fog lights.
• Rotate the headlight switch to AUTO for
automatic headlights.
• When set to AUTO, the system automatically turns the headlights on or off based
on ambient light levels.
Headlight Switch
1 — Automatic Headlights
2 — Rotate Headlight Switch
3 — Rotate Dimmer
4 — Rotate Ambient
67
O P E R AT I N G Y O U R V E H I C L E
Automatic High Beams
The Automatic High Beams system provides increased forward lighting at night by
automating high beam control through the use of a digital camera mounted above the
inside rearview mirror. This camera detects vehicle specific light and automatically
switches from high beams to low beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view. This
feature is programmable through the Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” in your Owner’s Manual on
www.dodge.com/en/owners/manuals for further details.
Instrument Panel Dimmer
Rotate the dimmer control to the extreme bottom position to fully dim the instrument
panel lights and prevent the interior lights from illuminating when a door is opened.
Rotate the dimmer control up to increase the brightness of the instrument panel and
cupholders when the parking lights or headlights are on.
Rotate the dimmer control up to the next detent position to fully brighten the odometer
and radio when the parking lights or headlights are on.
Rotate the dimmer control up to the last detent position to turn on the interior lighting.
If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, the dimming is programmable through the
Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” in your Owner’s Manual on www.dodge.com/en/owners/manuals for further details.
Ambient Light Dimmer
Rotate the ambient light control up or down to increase or decrease the brightness of the
release handle, map pocket (if equipped), overhead and floor lighting when the parking
lights or headlights are on.
Rotate to extreme bottom position to turn off.
68
O P E R AT I N G Y O U R V E H I C L E
SPEED CONTROL
When engaged, the Speed Control takes over accelerator operations at speeds greater than
25 mph (40 km/h).
The Speed Control buttons are located on the right side of the steering wheel.
NOTE:
In order to ensure proper operation, the
Speed Control System has been designed to
shut down if multiple speed control functions are operated at the same time. If this
occurs, the Speed Control System can be
reactivated by pushing the Speed Control
on/off button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Push the on/off button to activate the
Speed Control. “CRUISE CONTROL
READY” will appear on the instrument cluster display to indicate the Speed Control is
on. To turn the system off, push the on/off
button a second time. “CRUISE CONTROL
OFF” will appear on the instrument cluster
display to indicate the Speed Control is off.
The system should be turned off when not
in use.
Speed Control Switches
1 — Push Cancel
2 — Push Set+/Accel
3 — Push Resume
4 — Push On/Off
5 — Push Set-/Decel
WARNING!
Leaving the Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous. You could
accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose control
and have an accident. Always leave the system off when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Speed Control on. When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, push the
SET (+) or SET (–) button and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate
at the selected speed. Once a speed has been set a message, “CRUISE CONTROL SET TO
MPH (km/h)”, will appear indicating what speed was set. A cruise indicator lamp, along
with set speed will also appear and stay on in the instrument cluster display when the
speed is set.
69
O P E R AT I N G Y O U R V E H I C L E
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC button or normal brake pressure while
slowing the vehicle will deactivate the Speed Control without erasing the set speed from
memory.
Pushing the on/off button or turning the ignition to the OFF position erases the set speed
from memory.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button and release. Resume can be used
at any speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by pushing the SET (+) button.
The driver's preferred units can be selected through the instrument panel settings if
equipped. Refer to “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” in your Owner’s Manual on
www.dodge.com/en/owners/manuals for further details. The speed increment shown is
dependant on the chosen speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a 1 mph increase in set speed. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to increase until the
button is released, then the new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a 1 km/h increase in set speed. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to increase until the
button is released, then the new set speed will be established.
70
O P E R AT I N G Y O U R V E H I C L E
To Decrease Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can decrease speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
The driver's preferred units can be selected through the instrument panel settings if
equipped. Refer to “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” in your Owner’s Manual on
www.dodge.com/en/owners/manuals for further details. The speed decrement shown is
dependant on the chosen speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph decrease in set speed. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to decrease until the
button is released, then the new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to decrease until the
button is released, then the new set speed will be established.
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the pedal is released, the vehicle will
return to the set speed.
Using Speed Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the vehicle set speed.
NOTE:
The Speed Control system maintains speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur, it may be preferable to drive without
Speed Control.
WARNING!
Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed.
Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose control and have
an accident. Do not use Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy,
snow-covered or slippery.
71
O P E R AT I N G Y O U R V E H I C L E
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC)
If your vehicle is equipped with Adaptive
Cruise Control, the controls operate exactly
the same as Speed Control with only a
couple of differences. With this option, you
can set a specified distance you would like
to maintain between you and the vehicle in
front of you.
If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead,
ACC will apply limited braking or acceleration automatically to maintain a preset following distance, while matching the speed
of the vehicle ahead.
If the sensor does not detect a vehicle
ahead of you, ACC will maintain a fixed set
speed.
ACC On/Off
• Push and release the Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) on/off button.
Adaptive Cruise Switches
1 — Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off
2 — Distance Setting – Decrease
3 — Distance Setting – Increase
ACC READY will appear in the instrument
cluster display to indicate the ACC is on.
• Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button a second time to turn
the system off.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) OFF will appear in the instrument cluster display to
indicate the ACC is off.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
While ACC is set, you can increase the set speed by pushing the SET (+) button.
The driver's preferred units can be selected through the touchscreen radio settings if
equipped. Refer to “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” in your Owner’s Manual on
www.dodge.com/en/owners/manuals for further details. The speed increment shown is
dependant on the chosen speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a 1 mph increase in set speed. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to increase in 5 mph
increments until the button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected in the
instrument cluster display.
72
O P E R AT I N G Y O U R V E H I C L E
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a 1 km/h increase in set speed. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to increase in 10 km/h
increments until the button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected in the
instrument cluster display.
To Decrease Speed
While ACC is set, the set speed can be decreased by pushing the SET (-) button.
The driver's preferred units can be selected through the touchscreen radio settings if
equipped. Refer to “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” in your Owner’s Manual on
www.dodge.com/en/owners/manuals for further details. The speed increment shown is
dependant on the chosen speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph decrease in set speed. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to decrease in 5 mph
increments until the button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected in the
instrument cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to decrease in 10 km/h
increments until the button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected in the
instrument cluster display.
NOTE:
• When you override and push the SET (+) button or SET (-) buttons, the new Set Speed
will be the current speed of the vehicle.
• When you use the SET (-) button to decelerate, if the engine’s braking power does not
slow the vehicle sufficiently to reach the set speed, the brake system will automatically
slow the vehicle.
• The ACC system applies the brake down to 15 mph (24 km/h) when following a target
vehicle.
• The ACC system maintains set speed when driving up hill and down hill. However, a
slight speed change on moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshifting may occur
while climbing uphill or descending downhill. This is normal operation and necessary
to maintain set speed. When driving up hill and down hill, the ACC system will cancel
if the braking temperature exceeds normal range (overheated).
73
O P E R AT I N G Y O U R V E H I C L E
Distance Setting (ACC Only)
The specified following distance for ACC can be set by varying the distance setting
between four bars (longest), three bars (long), two bars (medium) and one bar (short).
Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed, ACC calculates and sets the distance to
the vehicle ahead. This distance setting displays in the instrument cluster display.
• To increase the distance setting, push the Distance Setting—Increase button and
release. Each time the button is pushed, the distance setting increases by one bar
(longer).
• To decrease the distance setting, push the Distance Setting—Decrease button and
release. Each time the button is pushed, the distance setting decreases by one bar
(shorter).
Changing Modes (ACC Only)
If desired, the Adaptive Cruise Control mode can be turned off and the system can be
operated as a Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode. When in the Normal (Fixed
Speed) Cruise Control mode, the distance setting feature will be disabled and the system
will maintain the speed you set.
• To change between the different cruise control modes, push the Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) on/off button which turns the ACC and the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
Control off.
• Pushing the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control on/off button will result in turning on
(changing to) the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode.
Refer to your Owner's Manual on www.dodge.com/en/owners/manuals for further
information.
WARNING!
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience system. It is not a substitute for active
driving involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibility to be attentive of road,
traffic, and weather conditions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle ahead; and, most
importantly, brake operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road
conditions. Your complete attention is always required while driving to maintain safe
control of your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision and
death or serious personal injury.
The ACC system:
• Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming vehicles, and stationary objects (e.g., a
stopped vehicle in a traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
• Cannot take street, traffic, and weather conditions into account, and may be limited
upon adverse sight distance conditions.
• Does not always fully recognize complex driving conditions, which can result in
wrong or missing distance warnings.
• Can only apply a maximum of 40% of the vehicle’s braking capability, and will not
bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
74
O P E R AT I N G Y O U R V E H I C L E
WARNING!
You should switch off the ACC system:
• When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow, sleet, heavy traffic, and complex driving
situations (i.e., in highway construction zones).
• When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp; when driving on roads that are
winding, icy, snow-covered, slippery, or have steep uphill or downhill slopes.
• When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes.
• When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a constant speed.
The Cruise Control system has two control modes:
• Adaptive Cruise Control mode for maintaining an appropriate distance between
vehicles.
• Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode for cruising at a constant preset speed.
For additional information, refer to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in
your Owner’s Manual on www.dodge.com/en/owners/manuals for further information.
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control will not react to preceding vehicles. Always be
aware of the mode selected.
You can change the mode by using the Cruise Control buttons. The two control modes
function differently. Always confirm which mode is selected.
FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW)
The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system provides the driver with audible warnings
and visual warnings within the instrument cluster display, to warn the driver when it
detects a potential frontal collision. The warnings are intended to provide the driver with
enough time to react, avoid or mitigate the potential collision.
NOTE:
FCW monitors the information from the forward looking sensors as well as the Electronic
Brake Controller (EBC), to calculate the probability of a forward collision. When the
system determines that a forward collision is probable, the driver will be provided with
audible and visual warnings.
Turning FCW On Or Off
The forward collision button is located in the Uconnect display in the controls settings.
When FCW is selected "off", there will be an "FCW OFF" icon that appears in the
instrument cluster display.
NOTE:
• The default status of FCW is “on”, this allows the system to warn you of a possible
collision with the vehicle in front of you.
• Changing the FCW status to “off” prevents the system from warning you of a possible
collision with the vehicle in front of you. If FCW is set to off, “FCW OFF” will be
displayed in the instrument cluster display.
75
O P E R AT I N G Y O U R V E H I C L E
Changing FCW Status
The FCW feature has two settings and can be changed within the Uconnect System
Screen:
• Far
• Near
Far
The default status of FCW is the “Far” setting.
The far setting provides warnings for potential collisions more distant in front of the
vehicle, allowing the driver to have the most reaction time to avoid a collision.
More cautious drivers that do not mind frequent warnings may prefer this setting.
NOTE:
This setting gives you the most reaction time.
Near
Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting, allows the system to warn you of a
potential frontal collision when you are much closer.
This setting provides less reaction time than the “Far” setting, which allows for a more
dynamic driving experience.
More dynamic or aggressive drivers that want to avoid frequent warnings may prefer this
setting.
Refer to your Owner’s Manual on www.dodge.com/en/owners/manuals for further details.
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to avoid a collision on its own, nor can
FCW detect every type of potential collision. The driver has the responsibility to avoid
a collision by controlling the vehicle via braking and steering. Failure to follow this
warning could lead to serious injury or death.
76
O P E R AT I N G Y O U R V E H I C L E
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST
The ParkSense Park Assist system provides visual and audible indications of the distance
between the rear bumper and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g. during a parking
maneuver.
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the ParkSense switch, located on the switch
panel below the Uconnect display.
NOTE:
ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or disabled) from the last ignition
cycle when the ignition is changed to the ON/RUN position.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector is in REVERSE. If ParkSense is
enabled at this gear selector position, the system will remain active until the vehicle speed
is increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or above. The system will become active
again if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately 6 mph (9 km/h).
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind
the vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of view.
NOTE:
• The sensors can detect obstacles from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to
79 inches (200 cm) from the rear bumper while the vehicle is in REVERSE, a warning
will display in the instrument cluster display only when “Sound and Display” is
selected from the Uconnect System.
• As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the instrument cluster display will show
fewer arcs and the sound tone will change from slow, to fast, to continuous.
Refer to your Owner's Manual on www.dodge.com/en/owners/manuals for further details.
77
O P E R AT I N G Y O U R V E H I C L E
EIGHT-SPEED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
The transmission gear range (PRNDM) is displayed both on the gear selector and in the
instrument cluster.
To select a gear range, press the lock button on the gear selector and move the selector
rearward or forward. To shift the transmission out of PARK, the engine must be running
and the brake pedal must be pressed. You must also press the brake pedal to shift from
NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds.
Select the DRIVE range for normal driving.
The electronically-controlled transmission
adapts its shift schedule based on driver
inputs, along with environmental and road
conditions. The transmission electronics
are self-calibrating; therefore, the first few
shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat
abrupt. This is a normal condition, and
precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers).
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped. Be sure
to keep your foot on the brake pedal when
shifting between these gears.
Automatic Transmission Gear Selector
The transmission gear selector has PARK, 1 — Lock Button
REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and 2 — Gear Selector
MANUAL (Autostick) shift positions.
Manual shifts can be made using the
Autostick shift control (refer to “AutoStick”
in this section for further information). Toggling the gear selector forward (-) or rearward
(+) while in the MANUAL (AutoStick) position (beside the DRIVE position) will manually
select the transmission gear, and will display the current gear in the instrument cluster as
M1, M2, M3, etc.
NOTE:
If the gear selector cannot be moved to the PARK, REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when
pushed forward) it is probably in the MANUAL (AutoStick, +/-) position (beside the DRIVE
position). In MANUAL (AutoStick) mode, the transmission gear is displayed in the
instrument cluster (as M1, M2, M3, etc.). Move the gear selector to the right (into the
DRIVE [D] position) for access to PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL.
Refer to “Automatic Transmission” in “Starting And Operating” in the Owner’s Manual at
www.dodge.com/en/owners/manuals for further information.
78
O P E R AT I N G Y O U R V E H I C L E
AUTOSTICK
AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission feature providing manual shift control,
giving you more control of the vehicle. AutoStick allows you to maximize engine braking,
eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts, and improve overall vehicle performance.
This system can also provide you with more control during passing, city driving, cold
slippery conditions, mountain driving, trailer towing, and many other situations.
Operation
When the gear selector is in the DRIVE (D) position, the transmission will operate
automatically, shifting between the eight available gears. To activate AutoStick, move the
gear selector into the MANUAL (M) position (beside the DRIVE position). The current
transmission gear will be displayed in the instrument cluster, along with a highlighted "M"
(Manual) indication. When the gear selector is in the MANUAL (M) position, tap the gear
selector forward (-) (or tap the (-) shift paddle on the steering wheel, if equipped) to
downshift the transmission to the next lower gear, or tap the lever rearward (+) (or tap the
(+) shift paddle, if equipped) to command an upshift.
NOTE:
• Tapping one of the steering wheelmounted shift paddles (+/-), if equipped,
while the gear selector is in DRIVE, will
activate a temporary AutoStick mode.
Tapping (-) to enter AutoStick mode will
Shifter Paddles
downshift the transmission to the next
lower gear, while tapping (+) to enter
1 — (–) Shift
2 — (+) Shift
AutoStick mode will retain the current
Paddle
Paddle
gear. The current gear will be displayed
in the instrument cluster, but the "M" will
not be highlighted. The transmission will
revert back to normal operation (if the
gear selector remains in DRIVE) after a period of time, depending on accelerator pedal
activity.
• In some models, the shift paddles may be disabled (or re-enabled, as desired) using the
Uconnect Personal settings or the Drive Mode Set-Up, accessed by selecting Performance Control (or Drive Modes, for SRT models) from the Apps menu in the Uconnect
screen.
In AutoStick mode, the transmission will shift up or down when (+/-) is manually selected
by the driver (using the gear selector, or the shift paddles [if equipped]), unless an engine
lugging or overspeed condition would result. It will remain in the selected gear until
another upshift or downshift is chosen, except as described below.
79
O P E R AT I N G Y O U R V E H I C L E
• In temporary AutoStick mode (gear selector in DRIVE), the transmission will automatically shift up when maximum engine speed is reached. If the accelerator is fully
depressed, the transmission will downshift when possible (based on current vehicle
speed and gear, except 6.2L and 6.4L models). Lack of accelerator pedal activity will
cause the transmission to revert to automatic operation.
• If normal AutoStick mode is engaged (gear selector in MANUAL position), manual gear
selection will be maintained until the gear selector is returned to DRIVE, or as
described below. The transmission will not upshift automatically at redline in this
mode, nor will downshifts be obtained if the accelerator pedal is pressed to the floor.
• The transmission will automatically downshift as the vehicle slows (to prevent engine
lugging) and will display the current gear.
• The transmission will automatically downshift to first gear when coming to a stop. After
a stop, the driver should manually upshift (+) the transmission as the vehicle is
accelerated.
• You can start out, from a stop, in first or second gear. Tapping (+) (at a stop) will allow
starting in second gear. Starting out in second gear can be helpful in snowy or icy
conditions.
• If a requested downshift would cause the engine to over-speed, that shift will not occur.
• The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low of a vehicle speed.
• Holding the (-) paddle depressed (if equipped), or holding the gear selector in the (-)
position, will downshift the transmission to the lowest gear possible at the current
speed.
• Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when AutoStick is enabled.
• The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a fault or overheat condition is
detected.
To disengage AutoStick mode, return the gear selector to the DRIVE position, or press and
hold the (+) shift paddle (if equipped, and the gear selector is already in DRIVE) until “D”
is once again indicated in the instrument cluster. You can shift in or out of the AutoStick
mode at any time without taking your foot off the accelerator pedal.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery surface. The drive wheels
could lose their grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or personal injury.
80
O P E R AT I N G Y O U R V E H I C L E
SPORT MODE — WITHOUT PERFORMANCE CONTROL
Your vehicle is equipped with a Sport Mode feature. This mode is a configuration set up
for typical enthusiast driving. The engine, transmission (when equipped with automatic
transmission), and steering systems are all set to their SPORT settings. Sport Mode will
provide improved throttle response and modified shifting for an enhanced driving
experience, as well the greatest amount of steering feel. This mode may be activated and
deactivated by pushing the Sport button on the instrument panel switch bank.
NOTE:
If equipped with a manual transmission, the 1 - 4 Skip Shift Feature is disabled in SPORT
Mode.
For vehicles equipped with Drive Modes or a “SUPER TRACK PAK” button, refer to
“Performance Control — If Equipped” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” on
www.dodge.com/en/owners/manuals or in the “Drive Mode Supplement” within your
Owner’s information kit for further information.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION 1 TO 4 SKIP SHIFT
In Default or Street Drive Modes, there are times when you must shift the transmission
directly from first gear to fourth gear instead of from first gear to second gear. This is to
help you get the best possible fuel economy from your vehicle. This occurs when the
engine coolant (antifreeze) is higher than 106°F (41°C), vehicle speed is greater than
19 mph (30 km/h) but less than 21 mph (34 km/h), and the transmission is in first gear,
and the accelerator is at ¼ throttle or less.
NOTE:
The 1 - 4 Skip Shift feature is disabled when selecting Sport Mode, or when selecting
Track or Custom Drive Modes (SRT only). Refer to “Performance Control — If Equipped”
in the “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” or “SRT Drive Modes” in the “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” sections of your Owner's Manual on
www.dodge.com/en/owners/manuals for further descriptions of these modes.
After you shift the transmission to fourth gear, you can press the clutch in and shift to
another forward gear.
81
O P E R AT I N G Y O U R V E H I C L E
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS (ATC)
Uconnect 5.0 Touchscreen Automatic Climate Controls
Uconnect 5.0 Touchscreen Automatic Climate Controls
1 — Max A/C Button
2 — A/C Button
3 — Air Recirculation Button
4 — Front Defroster Button
5 — Rear Defroster Button
6 — Climate Control Button
82
7 — Mode Control Button
8 — Off Button
9 — Auto Button
10 — Sync Button
11 — Temperature Control Button
12 — Blower Control Button
O P E R AT I N G Y O U R V E H I C L E
Uconnect 8.4 Automatic Climate Controls
Uconnect 8.4 Touchscreen Automatic Climate Controls
1 — MAX A/C Button
2 — A/C Button
3 — Air Recirculation Button
4 — AUTO Button
5 — FRONT Defroster Button
6 — REAR Defroster Button
7 — Passenger Temperature Up
8 — Passenger Temperature Down
9 — SYNC Button
10 — Blower Control Buttons
11 — Mode Control Buttons
12 — OFF Button
13 — Driver Temperature Down
14 — Driver Temperature Up
83
O P E R AT I N G Y O U R V E H I C L E
Automatic Climate Control Knobs
Automatic Climate Control Knobs
1 — FRONT Defroster Button
2 — Driver Temperature Up
3 — Blower Control Knob
4 — OFF Button
5 — Passenger Temperature Up
6 — A/C Button
7 — Air Recirculation Button
8 — Passenger Temperature Down
9 — AUTO Button
10 — Driver Temperature Down
11 — REAR Window Defroster Button
Automatic Operation
The climate system will automatically adjust settings to achieve and maintain comfort.
• Press the AUTO button.
• Select the desired temperature by pushing the Temperature Controls for the driver
and/or passenger.
Air Conditioning (A/C)
If the air conditioning button is pressed while in AUTO mode, the system will exit AUTO
mode and stay in A/C. The mode and blower will be set at the closest mode and blower
position that the system was operating in AUTO.
84
O P E R AT I N G Y O U R V E H I C L E
MAX A/C
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling performance.
• Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C and the prior settings. The button on the
touchscreen illuminates when MAX A/C is ON.
In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be adjusted to desired user settings.
Pressing other settings will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to the prior settings and
the MAX A/C indicator will turn off.
SYNC Temperature Button
• Press the “SYNC” button once to control driver and passenger temperatures simultaneously.
• Press the “SYNC” button a second time to control the temperatures individually.
Air Recirculation
• Use Recirculation for maximum A/C operation.
• For window defogging, turn the Recirculation button off.
• If the Recirculation button is pushed while in the AUTO mode, the indicator light may
flash three times to indicate the cabin air is being controlled automatically. The
Recirculation button will be greyed out in these conditions.
Heated Mirrors
The mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This feature is activated whenever you turn on
the rear window defroster.
PARKVIEW REAR BACK-UP CAMERA
You can see an on-screen image of the rear of your vehicle whenever the transmission is
shifted into REVERSE. The ParkView Rear Back-Up Camera image will be displayed on
the radio display screen, located on the center stack of the instrument panel.
If the radio display screen appears foggy, clean the camera lens located on the rear of the
vehicle above the rear license plate.
Refer to “ParkView Rear Back-Up Camera — If Equipped” in “Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle” in your Owner's Manual on www.dodge.com/en/owners/manuals
for further details.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up; even when using the ParkView Rear Back-Up
Camera. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to check for
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before backing up.
You must continue to pay attention while backing up. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
85
O P E R AT I N G Y O U R V E H I C L E
BLIND SPOT MONITORING
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radar sensors, located inside the rear
bumper fascia, to detect highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks, motorcycles
etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the rear/front/side of the vehicle.
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane width on both sides of the vehicle
12 ft (3.8 m). The zone length starts at the outside rear view mirror and extends
approximately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear bumper of the vehicle. The BSM system
monitors the detection zones on both sides of the vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert the driver of vehicles in these
areas.
When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light will momentarily illuminate in both
outside rear view mirrors to let the driver
know that the system is operational. The
BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any forward gear or REVERSE,
and enters standby mode when the vehicle
is in PARK.
Rear Detection Zones
The BSM warning light, located in the outside mirrors, will illuminate if a vehicle moves
into a blind spot zone.
The BSM system can also be configured to
sound an audible (chime) alert and mute
the radio to notify you of objects that have
entered the detection zones.
Blind Spot Mirror
86
O P E R AT I N G Y O U R V E H I C L E
Rear Cross Path (RCP)
The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the driver when backing out of
parking spaces where the vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed slowly and
cautiously out of the parking space until the rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP
system will then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an oncoming vehicle is
detected, will alert the driver. When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the driver
is alerted using both the visual and audible alarms, including reducing the radio volume.
Refer to “Blind Spot Monitoring” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” in your
Owner’s Manual on www.dodge.com/en/owners/manuals for further details.
Modes Of Operation
Three selectable modes of operation are available in the Uconnect System. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” in your Owner’s Manual
at www.dodge.com/en/owners/manuals for further details.
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only (Default Setting)
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the
appropriate side view mirror based on a detected object. However, when the system is
operating in Rear Cross Path mode, the system will respond with both visual and audible
alerts when a detected object is present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio
volume is reduced.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode, the BSM system will provide a
visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror based on a detected object. If the turn
signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an alert present on that side of the vehicle,
an audible chime will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and detected object are
present on the same side at the same time, both the visual and audio alerts will be issued.
In addition to the audible alert the radio (if on) volume will be reduced.
NOTE:
• Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM system, the radio volume is
reduced.
• If the Hazard Warning Flashers are on, the system will request the appropriate visual
alert only.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond with both visual and audible alerts
when a detected object is present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio
volume is reduced. Turn signal and Hazard signal status is ignored; the RCP state always
requests the chime.
87
O P E R AT I N G Y O U R V E H I C L E
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off, there will be no visual or audible alerts from either the
BSM or RCP systems.
NOTE:
The BSM system will store the current operating mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each
time the vehicle is started, the previously stored mode will be recalled and used.
POWER SUNROOF
The power sunroof switch is located on the overhead console.
Opening Sunroof
Express Open
Push the switch rearward and release it within one-half second. The sunroof will fully open
and stop automatically.
Manual Open
Push and hold the switch rearward to open the sunroof. Any release of the switch will stop
the movement, and the sunroof will remain in a partially open position until the switch is
pushed again.
Venting Sunroof
Push and release the button and the sunroof will open to the vent position.
This is called “Express Vent” and will occur regardless of sunroof position. During Express
Vent operation, any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
Closing Sunroof
Express Closing
Push the switch forward and release it within one-half second. The sunroof will fully close
automatically from any position.
Manual Closing
Push and hold the switch forward to close the sunroof. Any release of the switch will stop
the movement, and the sunroof will remain in a partially closed position until the switch
is pushed again.
88
O P E R AT I N G Y O U R V E H I C L E
Pinch Protection Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof during Express Close
operation. If an obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the sunroof will
automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs. Next, push the switch
forward and release to Express Close.
NOTE:
If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result in Pinch Protect reversals, the fourth
close attempt will be a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled.
WARNING!
• Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do not leave the key fob in or near
the vehicle, and do not leave the ignition node in a vehicle equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unattended
children, can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power
sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open
sunroof. You could also be severely injured or killed. Always fasten your seat belt
properly and make sure all passengers are properly secured.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other
body parts, or any object to project through the sunroof opening. Injury may result.
WIND BUFFETING
• Wind buffeting can be described as a helicopter-type percussion sound. If buffeting
occurs with the windows open, adjust the windows together.
• If buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening, or adjust any
window. This will minimize buffeting.
89
ELECTRONICS
YOUR VEHICLE'S SOUND SYSTEM
1. Uconnect Phone Button pg. 147
2. Uconnect Voice Command Button pg. 134
3. Uconnect Phone Hang Up Button pg. 147
4. Steering Wheel Audio Control (Left – Behind Steering Wheel) pg. 156
5. Steering Wheel Audio Control (Right – Behind Steering Wheel) pg. 156
6. Volume Knob And Power On/Off Button
90
ELECTRONICS
7. Uconnect 8.4 Radio pg. 113
8. Tune/Scroll Knob – Browse/Enter Button
9. Power Outlet pg. 165
10. Power Outlet (located Inside Center Console) pg. 165
11. USB Port pg. 120
12. AUX Jack pg. 120
13. USB Port pg. 120
91
ELECTRONICS
IDENTIFYING YOUR RADIO
Uconnect 5.0
• 5” Touchscreen
• Three buttons on the faceplate on either
side of the display
Uconnect 5.0
Uconnect 8.4
• 8.4” Touchscreen
• Nav icon will NOT be visible in the lower menu bar of the screen, and is NOT listed
within Apps
• SiriusXM Travel Link feature is listed within Apps
Uconnect 8.4 NAV
• 8.4” Touchscreen
• Nav icon will be listed within Apps
• SiriusXM Travel Link feature listed
within Apps
Uconnect 8.4 NAV
92
ELECTRONICS
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may be equipped with both wired and
wireless networks. These networks allow your vehicle to send and receive information.
This information allows systems and features in your vehicle to function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security features to reduce the risk of
unauthorized and unlawful access to vehicle systems and wireless communications.
Vehicle software technology continues to evolve over time and FCA US LLC, working with
its suppliers, evaluates and takes appropriate steps as needed. Similar to a computer or
other devices, your vehicle may require software updates to improve the usability and
performance of your systems or to reduce the potential risk of unauthorized and unlawful
access to your vehicle systems.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your vehicle systems may still exist, even
if the most recent version of vehicle software (such as Uconnect software) is installed.
WARNING!
• It is not possible to know or to predict all of the possible outcomes if your vehicle’s
systems are breached. It may be possible that vehicle systems, including safety
related systems, could be impaired or a loss of vehicle control could occur that may
result in an accident involving serious injury or death.
• ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or CD) into your vehicle if it came from a
trusted source. Media of unknown origin could possibly contain malicious software,
and if installed in your vehicle, it may increase the possibility for vehicle systems to
be breached.
• As always, if you experience unusual vehicle behavior, take your vehicle to your
nearest authorized dealer immediately.
NOTE:
• FCA or your dealer may contact you directly regarding software updates.
• To help further improve vehicle security and minimize the potential risk of a security
breach, vehicle owners should:
• Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com/software-update to learn about available
Uconnect software updates.
• Only connect and use trusted media devices (e.g. personal mobile phones,
USBs, CDs).
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications cannot be assured. Third parties may
unlawfully intercept information and private communications without your consent. For
further information, refer to “Data Collection & Privacy” in “Uconnect + SiriusXM
Guardian” in your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement and “Onboard Diagnostic
System (OBD II) Cybersecurity” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” in your Owner’s Manual on
www.dodge.com/en/owners/manuals/.
93
ELECTRONICS
SIRIUSXM GUARDIAN — IF EQUIPPED
SiriusXM Guardian — If Equipped (Available on Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV —
U.S. Residents Only)
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your
hands on the steering wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks related to
the use of the Uconnect and SiriusXM Guardian features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect features and SiriusXM Guardian services when it is safe to
do so. Failure to do so may result in an accident involving serious injury or death.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by the subscriber.
SiriusXM Guardian enhances your ownership and driving experience. When connected to
an operable network, you can:
• Place a SOS Call to a SiriusXM Guardian operator who can connect you to emergency
responders.
• Remotely lock/unlock your doors and start your vehicle from virtually anywhere, using
the SiriusXM Guardian App from your device. You can also do so by logging into your
owner site, or by calling SiriusXM Guardian Care when your vehicle has an operable
network connection. Services can only be used where coverage is available.
• Receive text or email notifications if your vehicle's security alarm goes off.
• Receive stolen vehicle assistance, using GPS technology to help authorities locate your
vehicle if it is stolen.
• Get operator assistance using the ASSIST button on your interior rearview mirror.
Before you drive, familiarize yourself with the easy-to-use SiriusXM Guardian services.
1. The ASSIST and SOS Call buttons are located on your rearview mirror. The ASSIST
button is used for contacting Roadside Assistance, Vehicle Care, SiriusXM Guardian
Care, and Uconnect Care. The SOS Call button connects you to a SiriusXM Guardian
Care Agent, who can connect you to emergency services.
” button is located in the center of the menu bar of the radio
2. The Uconnect “Apps
touchscreen. This is where you can manage your Apps.
3. The Uconnect Voice Command and Uconnect Phone buttons are located on the left
side of your steering wheel. These buttons let you use your voice to give commands,
make phone calls, send and receive text messages hands-free, enter navigation
destinations, and control your radio and media devices.
94
ELECTRONICS
Included Trial Period For New Vehicles
Your new vehicle may come with an included trial period for use of the SiriusXM Guardian
services starting at the date of vehicle purchase (date based on vehicle sales notification
from your dealer). To activate the trial, you must first register with SiriusXM Guardian.
After the trial period, if you wish to continue your SiriusXM Guardian services you can
choose to purchase a subscription.
SiriusXM Guardian Activation (Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV, U.S. 48 Contiguous States,
Alaska And Hawaii)
To unlock the full potential of SiriusXM Guardian in your vehicle, you must activate your
SiriusXM Guardian services.
1. Press the Apps icon on the bottom of your in-vehicle touchscreen.
2. Select the Activate Services icon from your list of apps.
3. Select “Customer Care” to speak with a SiriusXM Guardian Customer Care agent who
will activate services in your vehicle, or select “Enter Email” to activate on the web.
Why sign up for SiriusXM Guardian? Here are just a few examples of things you’ll be able
to do:
• Know that help, if you need it, is only a button press away with Assist.
• Lock and unlock your vehicle doors from hundreds of miles away.
• Find your vehicle, no matter where you parked, using the convenient Vehicle Finder
function.
• Use Send & Go to send a navigation route from your mobile phone to your vehicle’s
navigation system.
For further information, please visit www.siriusxm.com/guardian.
95
ELECTRONICS
Download The SiriusXM Guardian App
You’re only a few steps away from using remote commands and other valuable services.
To use the SiriusXM Guardian App:
• Search for and download the "SiriusXM
Guardian" app from the store on your
compatible iPhone or Android powered
device.
• Log in to the app using the email address
and password you created when you activated the services.
• Press the “Remote” button on the bottom menu bar of the app to Lock/Unlock,
Remote Start (if equipped), and activate
your horn and lights remotely.
• Press the “Location” button on the bottom menu bar of the app to bring up a
map to locate your vehicle or send a
location to your vehicle’s navigation system.
Mobile App
• Press the menu button (three horizontal lines) in the upper left corner of the app to
access settings and support information.
Renewing Subscriptions (Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV, U.S. 48 Contiguous States,
Alaska And Hawaii)
Subscriptions can be purchased online by logging into your owner account. If you need
help push the ASSIST button on the rearview mirror, then select SiriusXM Guardian Care
or dial:
1-844-796-4827
Maintaining Your SiriusXM Guardian Account
Selling Your Vehicle
When you sell your vehicle, we recommend that you remove your SiriusXM Guardian
Account information from the vehicle. You can do this by pressing the ASSIST button in
your vehicle and selecting SiriusXM Guardian, or call from any phone:
1-844-796-4827
96
ELECTRONICS
Built-In Features
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the Uconnect features, SiriusXM Guardian
services, and applications in this vehicle. Only use Uconnect features and SiriusXM
Guardian services when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
WARNING!
• ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road. Some features are limited
while the vehicle is in motion. Some services, including SOS, will NOT work without
a subscription and an operable network connection.
• Ignoring the rearview mirror light could mean you may not have SOS Call service if
needed. If the rearview mirror light is illuminated, have an authorized dealer service
the SOS Call system immediately.
• The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) turns on the Air Bag Warning Light on the
instrument panel if a malfunction is detected in any part of the airbag system. If the
Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated, the air bag system may not be working properly
and the SOS Call system may not send a signal to a SOS Call operator if an air bag
is deployed. If the Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated, have an authorized dealer
service your vehicle immediately.
• If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g., fire or smoke is visible, dangerous
road conditions or location), do not wait for voice contact from a SOS Call operator.
All occupants should exit the vehicle immediately and move to a safe location.
• The SOS Call system is embedded into the vehicle’s electrical system. Do not add
aftermarket electrical equipment to the vehicle’s electrical system. This may prevent
your vehicle from sending a signal to initiate an emergency call. To avoid interference
that can cause the SOS Call system to fail, never add aftermarket equipment (e.g.,
two-way mobile radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your vehicle’s electrical
system or modify the antennas on your vehicle.
• IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY POWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUDING
DURING OR AFTER AN ACCIDENT), the Uconnect features, apps, and SiriusXM
Guardian services, among others, will not operate.
97
ELECTRONICS
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by the subscriber.
1. ASSIST Call (8.4/8.4 NAV) — The rearview mirror contains an ASSIST button, allowing
you to speak to a call center agent for support:
• Roadside Assistance Call — If you
get a flat tire, or need a tow, you’ll be
connected to someone who can help
anytime. Additional fees may apply.
Additional information in this section.
• Uconnect Care — In vehicle support
for Uconnect Apps and Features.
• SiriusXM Guardian Care — In vehicle
support for SiriusXM Guardian services.
• Vehicle Care — Total support for your
FCA US LLC vehicle.
SOS Call Button And ASSIST
1 — SOS Call Button
2 — ASSIST Button
NOTE:
In order to provide SiriusXM Guardian Services to you, we may record and monitor your
conversations with Roadside Assistance, Uconnect Care, SiriusXM Guardian Care, or
Vehicle Care, whether such conversations are initiated through the SiriusXM Guardian
services in your vehicle, your device, or via a landline device, and may share information
obtained through such recording and monitoring in accordance with regulatory requirements. You acknowledge, agree, and consent to any recording, monitoring or sharing of
information obtained through any such call recordings.
2. Emergency SOS Call (If Equipped) — The rearview mirror contains a SOS Call button
that, when pressed, may place a call from your vehicle to a SiriusXM Guardian Care
operator, who can connect you to emergency service operators, to request help from
local police, fire or ambulance personnel. If this button is accidentally pressed, you
will have ten seconds to stop the call. To cancel, press the SOS Call button again or
press the “Cancel” button shown on the touchscreen. After ten seconds has passed,
the SOS call will be placed and only the SOS Call operator can cancel it. The LED light
on the rearview mirror will turn green once a connection to a SOS Call operator has
been made. The green LED light will turn off once the SOS Call is terminated. Have an
authorized dealer service the vehicle if the rearview mirror light is continuously red. On
equipped vehicles, this feature requires a functioning electrical system, a subscription, and an operable network connection. If a connection is made between a SOS Call
operator and your vehicle, you understand and agree that SOS Call operators will stay
on the line, even after you connect with emergency services. The Emergency services
operator may, like any other emergency call, record conversations and sounds in and
near your vehicle upon connection.
98
ELECTRONICS
3. Security Alarm Notification — The Security Alarm Notification feature notifies you via
email or text (SMS) message when the vehicle’s factory-installed security alarm system
has been set-off. There are a number of reasons why your alarm may have been
triggered, one of which could be that your vehicle was stolen. If so, please see the
details of the Stolen Vehicle Assistance service below. When you activate, Security
Alarm Notification is automatically set to send you an email at the email address you
provide should the alarm go off. You may also opt to have a text message sent to your
device.
4. Stolen Vehicle Assistance — If your vehicle is stolen, contact local law enforcement
immediately to file a stolen vehicle report. Once this report has been filed, SiriusXM
Guardian Care can help locate your vehicle. The SiriusXM Guardian Care agent will ask
for the stolen vehicle report number issued by local law enforcement. As long as your
vehicle has a SiriusXM Guardian subscription and an operable network connection, the
agent may be able to locate the stolen vehicle and work with law enforcement to help
recover it. Your vehicle must have an operable network connection and must be
registered with SiriusXM Guardian with an active subscription that includes the
applicable feature.
NOTE:
Your vehicle must have a working electrical system for any of the in vehicle SiriusXM
Guardian services to operate.
SiriusXM Guardian Remote Features
If you own a compatible iPhone or Android powered device, the SiriusXM Guardian App
allows you to remotely lock or unlock your doors, start your engine or activate your horn and
lights from virtually anywhere. Your vehicle must be equipped with remote start, must
have a SiriusXM Guardian subscription, and must have an operable network connection.
Services can only be used where coverage is available. You can download the App from
Mopar Owner Connect or from the App Store (iPhone) or Google Play Store (Android). Visit
UconnectPhone.com to determine if your device is compatible. For Uconnect Phone
customer support and to determine if your device is compatible.
U.S. residents - visit UconnectPhone.com or call 1-877-855-8400.
Remote Start (If Equipped) — This feature provides the ability to start the engine on your
vehicle, without the keys and from virtually any distance. You can send a request to your
vehicle in one of two ways:
1. Using the SiriusXM Guardian App from a compatible device.
2. From the Mopar Owner Connect website.
• After 15 minutes if you have not entered your vehicle with the key, the engine will
shut off automatically.
• You can also send a command to turn-off an engine that has been remote started.
99
ELECTRONICS
• This remote function requires your vehicle to be equipped with a factory-installed
Remote Start system. To utilize this feature after the SiriusXM Guardian App is
downloaded, login with your user name and password.
To use this feature after the SiriusXM Guardian App is downloaded, login using your user
name and password. You will need your four digit SiriusXM Guardian Security PIN to
confirm the request. Press the “remote start” icon on your SiriusXM Guardian App to
remotely start the vehicle.
You can set-up notifications for your account to receive an email or text (SMS) message every
time a command is sent. Login to Mopar Owner Connect at moparownerconnect.com and
click on Edit Profile to manage SiriusXM Guardian Notifications.
Remote Door Lock/Unlock — This feature provides the ability to lock or unlock the door on
your vehicle, without the keys and from virtually any distance. You can send a request to
your vehicle in one of three ways:
1. Using the SiriusXM Guardian App from a compatible device.
2. From the Mopar Owner Connect website.
3. By contacting the SiriusXM Guardian Care on the phone.
To use this feature after the SiriusXM Guardian App is downloaded, login using your user
name and password. You will need your four digit SiriusXM Guardian Security PIN to
confirm the request. Press the “closed lock” icon on your SiriusXM Guardian App to lock
the doors, and press the “open lock” icon to unlock the driver’s door.
You can set-up notifications for your account to receive an email or text (SMS) message every
time a command is sent. Login to Mopar Owner Connect at moparownerconnect.com and
click on Edit Profile to manage SiriusXM Guardian Notifications.
Remote Horn And Lights — It’s easy to locate a vehicle in a dark, crowded or noisy parking
area by activating the horn and lights. It may also help if you need to draw attention to your
vehicle for any reason. You can send a request to your vehicle in one of three ways:
1. Using the SiriusXM Guardian App from a compatible device.
2. From the Mopar Owner Connect website.
3. By contacting the SiriusXM Guardian Care on the phone.
To use this feature after the SiriusXM Guardian App is downloaded, login using your user
name and password. You will need your four digit SiriusXM Guardian Security PIN to confirm
the request. You can set-up notifications for your account to receive an email or text (SMS)
message every time a command is sent. Login to Mopar Owner Connect at
moparownerconnect.com and click on Edit Profile to manage SiriusXM Guardian Notifications.
100
ELECTRONICS
Vehicle Finder
The Vehicle Finder feature of the SiriusXM Guardian Mobile App allows you to find the
location of your vehicle when you can't remember where it's parked. You can also sound
the alarm and flash the lights to make finding your vehicle even easier.
To find your vehicle:
1. Press the “Location” tab on the SiriusXM Guardian Mobile App bottom bar.
2. Select the “Vehicle” icon to determine the location of your vehicle.
3. Select the “Find Route” button that appears, once your vehicle is located.
4. Select your preferred Navigation App to route a path to your vehicle.
Send & Go
The Send & Go feature of the SiriusXM Guardian Mobile App allows you to search for a
destination on your mobile device and then send the route to your vehicle’s Uconnect
Navigation system.
To send a navigation route to your vehicle:
1. Press the “Location” tab on the SiriusXM Guardian Mobile App bottom bar.
2. Either type in the destination you would like to navigate to, or search through one of the
categories provided.
3. Select the destination you want to route to from the list that appears.
4. Press the “Send To Vehicle” button, and then confirm the destination by pressing
“Yes,” to send the navigation route to the Uconnect Navigation in your vehicle.
5. Finally, confirm the route inside your vehicle by pressing the “Go Now” option on the
pop-up that appears on the touchscreen, when the vehicle is started.
101
ELECTRONICS
UCONNECT 5.0
Uconnect 5.0
1 — RADIO Mode Button
2 — MEDIA Mode Button
3 — Uconnect PHONE Button
4 — COMPASS Button
5 — CLIMATE Button
6 — MORE Button
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the Uconnect features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do NOT attach any object to the touchscreen, doing so can result in damage to the
screen.
102
ELECTRONICS
Clock Setting
To start the clock setting procedure, perform the following:
1. Push the MORE button on the faceplate. Next press the “Settings” button on the
touchscreen and then press the “Clock and Date” button on the touchscreen.
2. Press the “Set Time” button on the touchscreen.
3. Press the “Up” or “Down” arrows to adjust the hours or minutes, then select the “AM”
or “PM” button on the touchscreen. You can also select 12hr or 24hr format by
pressing the desired button on the touchscreen.
4. Once the time is set, press the “Done” button on the touchscreen to exit the time
screen.
NOTE:
In the Clock Setting Menu, you can also select “Display Clock”, which turns the clock
display in the status bar on or off.
Equalizer, Balance And Fade
1. Push the MORE button on the faceplate.
2. Press the “Settings” button on the touchscreen.
3. Scroll down and press the “Audio” button on the touchscreen to get to the Audio
menu.
4. The Audio Menu shows the following options for you to customize your audio settings.
Equalizer
• Press the “Equalizer” button on the touchscreen to adjust the Bass, Mid and Treble.
Use the “+” or “–” button on the touchscreen to adjust the equalizer to your desired
settings. Press the “Done” button on the touchscreen when finished.
Balance/Fade
• Press the “Balance/Fade” button on the touchscreen to adjust the sound from the
speakers. Use the “arrow” button on the touchscreen to adjust the sound level from the
front and rear or right and left side speakers. Press the Center “C” button on the
touchscreen to reset the balance and fade to the factory setting. Press the “Done”
button on the touchscreen when finished.
Speed Adjustable
• Press the “Speed Adjusted Volume” button on the touchscreen to select between OFF,
1, 2 or 3. This will decrease the radio volume relative to a decrease in vehicle speed.
Press the “Done” button on the touchscreen when finished.
Loudness
• Press the “Loudness” button on the touchscreen to select the Loudness feature. When
this feature is activated it improves sound quality at lower volumes.
103
ELECTRONICS
Radio Operation
Uconnect 5.0 Radio Screen
1 — Radio Station Presets
2 — Show All Presets
3 — Seek Up
4 — Audio Settings
5 — Station Info
6 — Direct Tune
7 — Radio Band
8 — Seek Down
Seek Up/Down Buttons
• Press the up or down button to seek through radio stations in AM, FM or SXM bands.
• Hold either button to bypass stations without stopping.
Store Radio Presets Manually
The radio stores up to 12 presets in each of the radio modes. There are four visible presets
at the top of the radio screen. Pressing the “All” button on the touchscreen on the radio
home screen will display all of the preset stations for that mode.
To store a radio preset manually, follow the steps below:
1. Tune to the desired station.
2. Press and hold the desired preset button on the touchscreen for more than two seconds
or until you hear a confirmation beep.
104
ELECTRONICS
SiriusXM Premier Over 160 Channels
Get every channel available on your satellite radio, and enjoy all you want, all in one place.
Hear commercial-free music plus sports, news, talk and entertainment. Get all the
premium programming, including Howard Stern, every NFL game, Oprah Radio, every
MLB and NHL game, every NASCAR race, Martha Stewart and more. And get 20+ extra
channels, including SiriusXM Latino, offering 20 channels of commercial free music,
news, talk, comedy, sports and more dedicated to Spanish language programming.
To access SiriusXM Satellite Radio, push the RADIO button on the faceplate and then the
SXM button on the touchscreen.
SiriusXM services require subscriptions, sold separately after the 12-month trial included
with the new vehicle purchase. If you decide to continue your service at the end of your
trial subscription, the plan you choose will automatically renew and bill at then-current
rates until you call SiriusXM at 1-866-635-2349 for U.S. residents and 1-888-539-7474
for Canadian residents to cancel. See SiriusXM Customer Agreement for complete terms
at www.siriusxm.com for U.S. residents and www.siriusxm.ca for Canadian residents. All
fees and programming subject to change. Our satellite service is available only to those at
least 18 and older in the 48 contiguous USA and D.C. Our Sirius satellite service is also
available in PR (with coverage limitations). Our Internet radio service is available
throughout our satellite service area and in AK and HI. © 2017 Sirius XM Radio Inc.
Sirius, XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc.
USB/Audio Jack (AUX) — If Equipped
To select a specific audio source, push the
MEDIA button on the faceplate. To allow
music to play from your device through the
vehicle’s speakers, press the “Source” button then select one of the following modes:
USB/iPod
• USB/iPod Mode is entered by either inserting a USB Jump Drive or iPod cable
into the USB port or by pushing the
MEDIA button on the faceplate located
left of the display.
Uconnect Media Hub
1 — AUX Port
2 — USB Port
3 — SD Card Slot
Audio Jack (AUX)
• The AUX allows a device, such as an
MP3 player or an iPod, to be plugged into the radio and utilize the vehicle’s audio
system, using a 3.5 mm audio cable, to amplify the source and play through the vehicle
speakers.
• The functions of the device are controlled using the device buttons, not the buttons on
the radio. The volume may be controlled using the radio or device.
105
ELECTRONICS
SD Card
• Play songs stored on an SD card inserted into the SD card slot.
• Song playback can be controlled using the radio or Steering Wheel Audio Controls to
play, skip to the next or previous track, browse, and list the contents.
Bluetooth
• If using a Bluetooth-equipped device, you may also be able to stream music to your
vehicle's sound system.
UCONNECT 5.0 VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS
Introducing Uconnect
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these helpful quick tips. It provides the key
Voice Commands and tips you need to know to control your Uconnect 5.0 system.
Key Features:
• 5” touchscreen
• Three buttons on either side of the display
Uconnect 5.0
106
ELECTRONICS
Get Started
1. U.S. residents can visit UconnectPhone.com to check device and feature compatibility
and to find device pairing instructions.
2. Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger conversations are examples of noise
that may impact recognition.
3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while facing straight ahead. The microphone is positioned on the headliner and aimed at the driver.
4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first push either the VR or Phone
button, wait until after the beep, then say your Voice Command.
5. You can interrupt the help message or system prompts by pushing the VR or Phone
button and saying a Voice Command from current category.
All you need to control your Uconnect system with your voice are the buttons on your
steering wheel.
Uconnect VR/Phone Buttons
1 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call, Send Or Receive A Text
2 — Push To Begin Radio Or Media Functions
3 — Push To End Call
107
ELECTRONICS
Basic Voice Commands
The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any point while using your Uconnect
system.
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say:
• Cancel to stop a current voice session
• Help to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands
• Repeat to listen to the system prompts again
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice recognition system’s status. Cues
appear on the touchscreen.
Uconnect 5.0 Visual Cues
108
ELECTRONICS
Radio
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or SiriusXM Satellite Radio stations you would
like to hear. (Subscription or included SiriusXM Satellite Radio trial required.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say:
• Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM
• Tune to Satellite Hits 1
TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or want to learn a Voice Command, push
the VR button
and say “Help.” The system will provide you with a list of commands.
Uconnect 5.0 Radio
109
ELECTRONICS
Media
Uconnect offers connections via USB, SD, Bluetooth and auxiliary ports (If Equipped).
Voice operation is only available for connected USB and iPod devices.
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say one of the following commands and follow
the prompts to switch your media source or choose an artist.
• Change source to Bluetooth
• Change source to iPod
• Change source to USB
• Play artist Beethoven; Play album Greatest Hits; Play song Moonlight Sonata; Play
genre Classical
TIP: Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to see all of the music on your iPod or
USB device. Your Voice Command must match exactly how the artist, album, song and
genre information is displayed.
Uconnect 5.0 Media
110
ELECTRONICS
Phone
Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy with Uconnect. When the Phonebook button is illuminated on your touchscreen, your system is ready.
U.S. residents can visit UconnectPhone.com to check device and feature compatibility
and to find device pairing instructions.
Push the Phone button
. After the beep, say one of the following commands…
• Call John Smith
• Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system prompts
• Redial (call previous outgoing phone number)
• Call back (call previous incoming phone number)
TIP: When providing a Voice Command, push the Phone button
and say “Call,” then
pronounce the name exactly as it appears in your phone book. When a contact has
multiple phone numbers, you can say “Call John Smith work.”
Uconnect 5.0 Phone
111
ELECTRONICS
Voice Text Reply
Uconnect will announce incoming text messages. Push the Phone button
Listen. (Must have compatible device paired to Uconnect system.)
1. Once an incoming text message is read to you, push the Phone button
beep, say: Reply.
and say
. After the
2. Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the beep, repeat one of the pre-defined
messages and follow the system prompts.
TIP: Your device must have the full implementation of the Message Access Profile (MAP)
to take advantage of this feature. For details about MAP, visit UconnectPhone.com for
U.S. residents. Apple iPhone iOS6 or later supports reading incoming text messages only.
Yes.
No.
Okay.
Call me.
I’ll call you later.
I’m on my way.
I’m lost.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
Stuck in traffic.
See you later.
Start without me.
I’ll be late.
Where are you?
I will be <number>
minutes late.
Are you there yet?
I need directions.
Can’t talk right now.
See you in <number>
minutes.
Thanks.
Additional Information
© 2017 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar, Mopar Owner Connect and Uconnect are
registered trademarks of FCA US LLC. Android is a trademark of Google Inc. Yelp, Yelp
logo, Yelp burst and related marks are registered trademarks of Yelp. SiriusXM and all
related marks and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc.
For Uconnect system support, visit DriveUconnect.com or call: 1-877-855-8400
(24 hours a day 7 days a week)
112
ELECTRONICS
UCONNECT 8.4/8.4 NAV
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV At A Glance
Uconnect 8.4 NAV Radio Screen
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the Uconnect features, SiriusXM Guardian
services, and applications in this vehicle. Only use Uconnect features and SiriusXM
Guardian services when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do NOT attach any object to the touchscreen, doing so can result in damage to the
screen.
Setting The Time
• Model 8.4 NAV synchronizes time automatically via GPS, so it should not require any
time adjustment. If you do need to set the time manually, follow the instructions below
for Model 8.4 NAV.
• For Model 8.4, turn the unit on, and then press the time display at the top of the
screen. Press “Yes.”
113
ELECTRONICS
• If the time is not displayed at the top of the screen, press the “Settings” button on the
touchscreen. In the Settings screen, press the “Clock” button on the touchscreen, then
check or uncheck this option.
• Press “+” or “–” next to Set Time Hours and Set Time Minutes to adjust the time.
• If these features are not available, uncheck the Sync Time box.
• Press “X” to save your settings and exit out of the Clock Setting screen.
Background Themes
• Screen background themes are selectable from a pre-loaded list of themes. If you’d like
to set a theme, follow the instructions below.
• Press the “Settings” button on the touchscreen.
• Press the “Display” button on the touchscreen.
• Then press “Set Theme” button on the touchscreen and select a theme.
Audio Settings
• Press of the “Settings” button on the touchscreen to activate the Audio settings screen
to adjust Balance\Fade, Equalizer, and Speed Adjusted Volume.
• You can return to the Radio screen by pressing the “X” located at the top right.
Balance/Fade
• Press the “Balance/Fade” button on the touchscreen to Balance audio between the
front speakers or fade the audio between the rear and front speakers.
• Pressing the “Front,” “Rear,” “Left,” or “Right” buttons on the touchscreen or press
and drag the Speaker Icon to adjust the Balance/Fade.
Equalizer
• Press the “Equalizer” button on the touchscreen to activate the Equalizer screen.
• Press the “+” or “–” buttons on the touchscreen, or press and drag over the level bar
for each of the equalizer bands. The level value, which spans between plus or minus
nine, is displayed at the bottom of each of the Bands.
Speed Adjusted Volume
• Press the “Speed Adjusted Volume” button on the touchscreen to activate the Speed
Adjusted Volume screen. The Speed Adjusted Volume is adjusted by pressing the
volume level indicator. This alters the automatic adjustment of the audio volume with
variation to vehicle speed.
114
ELECTRONICS
Personalized Menu Bar
The Uconnect features and services in the main menu bar are easily changed for your
convenience. Simply follow these steps:
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Main Menu
1. Press the “Apps
” button to open the App screen.
2. Press and hold, then drag the selected App to replace an existing shortcut in the main
menu bar.
The new app shortcut, that was dragged down onto the main menu bar, will now be an
active App/shortcut.
NOTE:
This feature is only available if the vehicle is in PARK.
115
ELECTRONICS
Radio
Uconnect 8.4 NAV Radio
1 — Radio Station Presets
2 — Toggle Between Presets
3 — Status Bar
4 — View Small Navigation Map
5 — HD Radio
6 — Main Category Bar
7 — Audio Settings
8 — Seek Up
9 — Direct Tune To A Radio Station
10 — Seek Down
11 — Browse And Manage Presets
12 — Radio Bands
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the Uconnect features, SiriusXM Guardian
services, and applications in this vehicle. Only use Uconnect features and SiriusXM
Guardian services when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
• To access the Radio mode, press the “Radio” button on the touchscreen.
Selecting Radio Stations
• Press the desired radio band (AM, FM or SXM) button on the touchscreen.
116
ELECTRONICS
Seek Up/Seek Down
• Press the Seek up or down arrow buttons on the touchscreen for less than two seconds
to seek through radio stations.
• Press and hold either arrow button on the touchscreen for more than two seconds to
bypass stations without stopping. The radio will stop at the next listenable station once
the arrow button on the touchscreen is released.
Direct Tune
• Tune directly to a radio station by pressing the “Tune” button on the screen, and
entering the desired station number.
Store Radio Presets Manually
Your radio can store 36 total preset stations, 12 presets per band (AM, FM and SXM).
They are shown at the top of your radio screen. To see the 12 preset stations per band,
press the arrow button on the touchscreen at the top right of the screen to toggle between
the two sets of six presets.
To store a radio preset manually, follow the steps below:
1. Tune to the desired station.
2. Press and hold the desired numbered button on the touchscreen for more than two
seconds or until you hear a confirmation beep.
HD Radio — If Equipped
• HD Radio (available on Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV) operates similar to conventional radio
except it allows broadcasters to transmit a high-quality digital signal.
• With an HD radio receiver, the listener is provided with a clear sound that enhances the
listening experience. HD radio can also transmit data such as song title or artist.
SiriusXM Premier Over 160 Channels
Get every channel available on your satellite radio, and enjoy all you want, all in one place.
Hear commercial-free music plus sports, news, talk and entertainment. Get all the
premium programming, including Howard Stern, every NFL game, Oprah Radio, every
MLB and NHL game, every NASCAR race, Martha Stewart and more. And get 20+ extra
channels, including SiriusXM Latino, offering 20 channels of commercial free music,
news, talk, comedy, sports and more dedicated to Spanish language programming.
• To access SiriusXM Satellite Radio, press the “SXM” button on the touchscreen on the
main Radio screen.
117
ELECTRONICS
The following describes features that are available when in SiriusXM Satellite Radio
mode:
Seek Up/Seek Down
• Press the Seek arrow buttons on the touchscreen for less than two seconds to seek
through channels in SXM mode.
• Press and hold either arrow button on the touchscreen for more than two seconds to
bypass channels without stopping. The radio will stop at the next listenable channel
once the arrow button on the touchscreen is released.
Direct Tune
• Tune directly to a SXM channel by pressing the “Tune” button on the touchscreen on
the screen, and entering the desired station number.
Tune Start
• The Tune Start feature begins playing a song from the beginning when you tune to your
favorite preset SXM channel. Tune Start can be enabled or disabled through the
SiriusXM setup page.
Jump
• Automatically tells you when Traffic & Weather for a favorite city is available, and gives
you the option to switch to that channel. Press “Jump” to activate the feature. After
listening to Traffic and Weather, press “Jump” again to return to the previous channel.
Fav
• Activates the favorites menu. You can add up to 50 favorite artists or songs. Just press
“Add Fav Artist” or “Add Fav Song” while the song is playing. You will then be alerted
any time one of these songs, or works by these artists, is playing on other SiriusXM
channels.
Album Art
• When arriving at a station, the Channel Art will be displayed to the left of the station
information. After five seconds the Channel Art will be replaced with the Album Art (if
available).
SiriusXM Parental Controls
• You can skip or hide certain channels from view if you do not want access to them.
Press the “Apps” button on the touchscreen, then the “Settings” button on the
touchscreen, next press the “Sirius Setup” button on the touchscreen, then select
Channel Skip. Press the box check-mark next to the channel you want skipped. They
will not show up in normal usage.
• SiriusXM also offers the option to permanently block selected channels. Call
(1-888-601-6297 for U.S. customers, 1-877-438-9677 for Canadian customers)
and request the Family-Friendly Package.
118
ELECTRONICS
Browse
Lets you browse the SiriusXM channel listing or Genre listing. Favorites, Game Zone,
Weather and Jump settings also provide a way to browse the SiriusXM channel list.
Browse Sub-Menu
All
Genre
Presets
Favorites
Game Zone
Jump
Sub-Menu Description
Shows the channel listing.
Provides a list of all genres, and lets you jump to a channel within
the selected genre.
Lets you scroll the list of Preset satellite channels. Press the
channel, or press Enter on the Tune knob, to go to that channel.
Press the trash can icon to delete a preset. Your presets are also
shown at the top of the main Satellite Radio screen.
Lets you manage artists and songs in the Favorites list and configure Alert Settings to let you know when favorite songs or artists are
playing on other channels. Also, view a list of channels airing any of
your Favorites.
Provides alerts when your favorite sports teams are starting a game
which is being aired on other SiriusXM channels, or when their
game score is announced. You can select and manage your Teams
list here, and configure alerts.
Lets you select your favorite cities for Traffic & Weather information, which is used by the Jump feature on the main satellite radio
screen.
Replay
Lets you replay up to 44 minutes of the content of the current SiriusXM channel.
Replay Option
Play/Pause
Rewind/RW
Fast Forward/FW
Replay Time
Live
Option Description
Press to Pause content playback. Press Pause/Play again to resume
playback.
Rewinds the channel content in steps of five seconds. Press and hold to
rewind continuously, then release to begin playing content at that point.
Forwards the content, and works similarly to Rewind/RW. However, Fast
Forward/FW can only be used when content has been previously rewound.
Displays the amount of time in the upper center of the screen by which
your content lags the Live channel.
Resumes playback of Live content at any time while replaying rewound
content.
119
ELECTRONICS
• SiriusXM services require subscriptions, sold separately after the 12-month trial
included with the new vehicle purchase. If you decide to continue your service at the
end of your trial subscription, the plan you choose will automatically renew and bill at
then-current rates until you call SiriusXM at 1-866-635-2349 for U.S. residents and
1-888-539-7474 for Canadian residents to cancel. See SiriusXM Customer Agreement
for complete terms at www.siriusxm.com (U.S. residents) or siriusxm.ca (Canadian
residents). All fees and programming subject to change. Our satellite service is
available only to those at least 18 and older in the 48 contiguous USA and D.C. Our
Sirius satellite service is also available in PR (with coverage limitations). Our Internet
radio service is available throughout our satellite service area and in AK and HI.
©2017 Sirius XM Radio Inc. Sirius, XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks
of Sirius XM Radio Inc.
Media Hub — USB/Audio Jack (AUX) — If Equipped
There are many ways to play music from
MP3 players or USB devices through your
vehicle's sound system. Press your Media
button on the touchscreen to begin.
Audio Jack (AUX)
• The AUX allows a device to be plugged
into the radio and utilize the vehicle’s
sound system, using a 3.5 mm audio
cable, to amplify the source and play
through the vehicle speakers.
• Pressing the “AUX” button on the touchscreen will change the mode to auxiliary
device if the audio jack is connected,
allowing the music from your device to
be heard through the vehicle's speakers.
To activate the AUX, plug in the audio
jack.
• The functions of the device are controlled using the device buttons. The
volume may be controlled using the radio or device.
Uconnect Media Hub
1 — USB Port One
2 — Audio/AUX Jack
3 — USB Port Two
• To route the audio cable out of the center console, use the access cut out in the front
of the console.
120
ELECTRONICS
USB Port
• Connect your compatible device using a USB cable into the USB Port. USB Memory
sticks with audio files can also be used. Audio from the device can be played on the
vehicles sound system while providing metadata (artist, track title, album, etc.)
information on the radio display.
• When connected, the compatible USB device can be controlled using the radio or
Steering Wheel Audio Controls to play, skip to the next or previous track, browse, and
list the contents.
• The battery charges when plugged into the USB port (if supported by the specific
device).
• To route the USB cable out of the center console, use the access cut out.
NOTE:
When connecting your device for the first time, the system may take several minutes to
read your music, depending on the number of files. For example, the system will take
approximately five minutes for every 1,000 songs loaded on the device. Also during the
reading process, the Shuffle and Browse functions will be disabled. This process is
needed to ensure the full use of your features and only happens the first time it is
connected. After the first time, the reading process of your device will take considerably
less time unless changes are made or new songs are added to the playlist.
Bluetooth Streaming Audio
• If equipped with Uconnect Voice Command, your Bluetooth-equipped device may also
be able to stream music to your vehicle's sound system. Your connected device must be
Bluetooth-compatible and paired with your system (see Uconnect Phone for pairing
instructions). You can access the music from your connected Bluetooth device by
button on the touchscreen while in Media mode.
pressing the Bluetooth
121
ELECTRONICS
Media Controls
Media Controls
1 — Repeat Music Track
2 — Music Track And Time
3 — Shuffle Music Tracks
4 — Music Track Information
5 — Show Songs Currently In Queue To
Be Played
6 — Browse Music By
7 — Music Source
The controls are accessed by pressing the desired button on the touchscreen and choosing
between AUX, USB, or Bluetooth.
NOTE:
Uconnect will automatically switch to the appropriate mode when something is first
connected or inserted into the system.
122
ELECTRONICS
Android Auto
Android Auto is a feature of your Uconnect system, and your Android 5.0 Lollipop, or
higher, powered smartphone with a data plan, that allows you to project your smartphone
and a number of its apps onto the touchscreen radio display. Android Auto automatically
brings you useful information, and organizes it into simple cards that appear just when
they are needed. Android Auto can be used with Google's best-in-class speech technology,
the steering wheel controls, the knobs and buttons on your radio faceplate, and the radio
display’s touchscreen to control many of your apps. To use Android Auto follow the
following procedure:
1. Download the Android Auto app from the Google Play store on your Android-powered
smartphone.
2. Connect your Android powered smartphone to one of the media USB ports in your
vehicle. If the Android Auto app was not downloaded, the first time you plug your
device in, the app will begin to download.
NOTE:
Be sure to use the factory-provided USB cable that came with your phone, as aftermarket
cables may not work.
3. Once the device is connected and recognized, the “Phone” icon on the personalized menu bar will automatically
change to the Android Auto Icon.
Android Auto should automatically
launch, but if it does not launch automatically, refer to the Uconnect Owner’s
Manual Supplement for the procedure
to enable the feature “AutoShow”. You
can also launch it by touching the
Android Auto icon on the touchscreen.
Android Auto
Once Android Auto is up and running on your Uconnect radio, the following features can
be utilized using your smartphone’s data plan:
• Google Maps for navigation
• Google Play Music, Spotify, iHeart Radio, etc. for music
• Handsfree Calling, and Texting for communication
• Hundred of compatible apps
123
ELECTRONICS
NOTE:
To use Android Auto, make sure you are in an area with cellular coverage. Android Auto
may use cellular data and your cellular coverage is shown in the upper right corner of the
radio screen.
Google Maps Data And Cellular Coverage
Maps
Push and hold the VR button on the steering wheel or tap the microphone icon to ask
Google to take you to a desired destination by voice. You can also touch the Navigation
icon in Android Auto to access Google Maps.
NOTE:
If the VR button is not held, and is only pushed, the native Uconnect VR will prompt you
and any navigation command said will launch the native Uconnect navigation system.
While using Android Auto, Google Maps provides voice-guided:
• Navigation
• Live traffic information
• Lane guidance
Google Maps
124
ELECTRONICS
NOTE:
If you are using the native Uconnect navigation system, and you try and start a new route
using the Android Auto, via voice or any other method, a pop-up will appear asking if you
would like to switch from Uconnect navigation to smartphone navigation. A pop-up will
also appear, asking if you’d like to switch, if Android Auto is currently in use and you
attempt to launch a native Uconnect route. Selecting “Yes” will switch the navigation type
to the newly used method of navigation and a route will be planned for the new
destination. If “No” is selected the navigation type will remain unchanged.
For further information, refer to www.android.com/auto/.
For further information on the navigation function, please refer
https://support.google.com/android or https://support.google.com/androidauto/.
to
Music
Android Auto allows you to access and stream your favorite music with apps like Google
Play Music, iHeartRadio, and Spotify. Using your smartphone’s data plan, you can stream
endless music on the road.
NOTE:
Music apps, playlists, and stations must be set up on your smartphone prior to using
Android Auto, for them to work with Android Auto.
NOTE:
To see the metadata for the music playing
through Android Auto, select the Uconnect
System’s media screen.
For
further
information
refer
to
https://support.google.com/androidauto.
Android Auto Music
125
ELECTRONICS
Communication
With Android Auto connected, press and hold the VR button on the steering wheel to
activate voice recognition specific to the Android Auto. This will allow you to send and
reply to text messages, have incoming text messages read out loud, and place and receive
hands-free calls.
Android Auto Contact
Android Auto Phone
126
ELECTRONICS
Apps
The Android Auto App will display all the compatible apps that are available to use with
Android Auto, every time it is launched. You must have the compatible app downloaded,
and you must be signed in to the app for it to work with Android Auto. Refer to
g.co/androidauto to see the latest list of available apps for Android Auto.
Apple CarPlay Integration
Uconnect works seamlessly with Apple CarPlay, the smarter, more secure way to use your
iPhone in the car, and stay focused on the road. Use your Uconnect Touchscreen display,
the vehicle's knobs and controls, and your voice with Siri to get access to Apple Music,
Maps, Messages, and more.
To use CarPlay, make sure you are using iPhone 5 or later, have Siri enabled in Settings,
ensure your iPhone is unlocked for the very first connection only, and then use the
following procedure:
1. Connect your iPhone to one of the media USB ports in your vehicle.
NOTE:
Be sure to use the factory-provided Lightning cable that came with your phone, as
aftermarket cables may not work.
2. Once the device is connected and recognized, the “Phone” icon on the personalized
menu bar will automatically change to the Apple CarPlay icon. Apple CarPlay should
launch automatically, but if not, refer to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement for
the procedure to enable the feature “AutoShow”. You can also touch the Apple CarPlay
icon on the touchscreen to launch it.
Once CarPlay is up and running on your
Uconnect radio, the following features can
be utilized using your iPhone’s data plan:
• Phone
• Music
• Messages
• Maps
CarPlay
127
ELECTRONICS
NOTE:
To use CarPlay make sure that cellular data is turned on, and that you are in an area with
cellular coverage. Your data and cellular coverage is shown on the left side of the radio
screen.
CarPlay Data And Cellular Coverage
Phone
With CarPlay, press and hold the VR button on the steering wheel to activate a Siri voice
recognition session. You can also press and hold the Home button within CarPlay to start
talking to Siri. This will allow you to make calls or listen to voice mail as you normally
would using Siri on your iPhone.
NOTE:
Only temporarily pushing the VR button on the steering wheel will launch a native VR
session, not a Siri session, and it will not function with CarPlay.
Music
CarPlay allows you to access all your artists, playlists, and music from iTunes. Using your
iPhone’s data plan, you can also use select third party audio apps including music, news,
sports, podcasts and more.
Apple Music
128
ELECTRONICS
Messages
Just like Phone, CarPlay allows you to use Siri to send or reply to text messages. Siri can
also read incoming text messages, but driver’s will not be able to read messages, as
everything is done via voice.
Maps
To use your Apple Maps for navigation on your Uconnect system, launch CarPlay, and push
and hold the VR button on the steering wheel to use Siri to set your desired destination.
Alternatively, choose a Nearby destination by pressing Destinations and selecting a
category, by launching Siri from the destinations page, or even by typing in a destination.
NOTE:
• If the VR button is not held, and is only
pushed, the native Uconnect VR will
prompt you and any navigation command said will launch the native
Uconnect navigation system.
• If you are using the native Uconnect
navigation system, and you try and start
a new route using CarPlay, via voice or
Maps
any other method, a pop-up will appear
asking if you would like to switch from
Uconnect navigation to iPhone navigation. A pop-up will also appear, asking if you’d
like to switch, if an CarPlay navigation is currently in use and you attempt to launch a
native Uconnect route. Selecting “Yes” will switch the navigation type to the newly
used method of navigation and a route will be planned for the new destination. If “No”
is selected the navigation type will remain unchanged.
Navigation Pop-Up
129
ELECTRONICS
Apps
To use a compatible app with CarPlay, you must have the compatible app downloaded,
and you must be signed in to the app. Refer to http://www.apple.com/ios/carplay/ to see
the latest list of available apps for CarPlay.
Navigation
• The information in the section below is only applicable if you have the 8.4 NAV system
or the Navigation has been activated on your 8.4 system.
Press the “Nav” button on the touchscreen in the menu bar to access the Navigation system.
Changing The Navigation Voice Prompt Volume
1. Press the “Settings” button on the touchscreen in the lower right area of the screen.
2. In the Settings menu, press the “Guidance” button on the touchscreen.
3. In the Guidance menu, adjust the Nav Volume by pressing the “+” or “–” buttons on
the touchscreen.
Uconnect 8.4 NAV Navigation
1 — Search For A Destination In All
Categories
2 — Find A Destination
3 — View Map
4 — Navigate To Saved Home Destination
130
5 — Navigate To Saved Work Destination
6 — Navigation Settings
7 — Emergency
8 — Information
ELECTRONICS
Finding Points Of Interest
• From the main Navigation menu, press the “Where To?” button on the touchscreen,
then press the “Points of Interest” button on the touchscreen.
• Select a category and then a subcategory, if necessary.
• Select your destination and press the “GO!” button on the touchscreen.
Finding A Place By Spelling The Name
• From the Main Navigation Menu press the “Where to?” button on the touchscreen,
press the “Points of Interest” button on the touchscreen, then press the “Spell Name”
button on the touchscreen.
• Enter the name of your destination.
• Press the “List” button on the touchscreen.
• Select your destination and press the “GO!” button on the touchscreen.
One-Step Voice Destination Entry
• Enter a navigation destination without taking your hands off the wheel.
button on the steering wheel, wait for
• Just push the Uconnect Voice Command
the beep and say something like, "Find Address 800 Chrysler Drive Auburn Hills MI."
NOTE:
Destination entry is not available while your vehicle is in motion. However, you can also
use Voice Commands to enter an address while moving. Refer to “Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV
Voice Recognition Quick Tips” in this section for further information.
Setting Your Home Location
• To add a Home location, press the “Nav” button on the touchscreen in the menu bar
to access the Navigation system and the Main Navigation menu.
• Press the “Home” button on the touchscreen. You can add a Home location by either
selecting “Spell City,” “Spell Street,” or “Select Country.” Select County is automatically filled out based on your state.
• Once you have entered your Home location, select the “Save Home” button located on
the lower left-hand side of your touchscreen.
• To delete a saved Home location (or other saved locations), so you can save a new Home
location, press the “Nav” button on the touchscreen, and in the “Where To” screen,
press “Edit Where To” and then press the “Home” button on the touchscreen. Under
the Manage screen press the “Reset Location” button. A confirmation screen will
appear asking if you “Are you sure you want to reset this location?” Press “Reset” to
confirm the deletion. Set a new Home location by following the previous instructions.
131
ELECTRONICS
Home
• A Home location must be saved in the system. From the Main Navigation menu, press
the “Home” button on the touchscreen.
Uconnect 8.4 NAV Map
1 — Distance To Next Turn
2 — Next Turn Street
3 — Estimated Time Of Arrival
4 — Zoom In And Out
5 — Your Location On The Map
6 — Navigation Main Menu
7 — Current Street Location
8 — Navigation Routing Options
Your route is marked with a blue line on the map. If you depart from the original route, your
route is recalculated. A speed limit icon could appear as you travel on major roadways.
Adding A Stop
• To add a stop you must be navigating a route.
• Press the “Menu” button on the touchscreen to return to the Main Navigation menu.
• Press the “Where To?” button on the touchscreen, then search for the extra stop. When
another location has been selected, you can choose to cancel your previous route, add
as the first destination or add as the last destination.
• Press the desired selection and press the “GO!” button on the touchscreen.
Taking A Detour
• To take a detour you must be navigating a route.
• Press the “Detour” button on the touchscreen.
132
ELECTRONICS
NOTE:
If the route you are currently taking is the only reasonable option, the device may not
calculate a detour. For more information, see your Uconnect Owner's Manual Supplement.
SiriusXM Traffic Plus (8.4 NAV & US Market Only)
Don't Drive Through Traffic. Drive Around It.
Avoid congestion before you reach it. By enhancing your vehicle's navigation system with
the ability to see detailed traffic information, you can pinpoint traffic incidents, determine
average traffic speed and estimate travel time along your route. Since the service is
integrated with a vehicle's navigation system, SiriusXM Traffic Plus can help drivers pick
the fastest route based on traffic conditions.
• Detailed information on traffic speed, accidents, construction, and road closings.
• Traffic information from multiple sources, including police and emergency services,
cameras and road sensors.
• Coast-to-coast delivery of traffic information.
• View conditions for points along your route and beyond. Available in over 130 markets.
SiriusXM Travel Link (8.4 NAV & US Market Only)
In addition to delivering over 130 channels of the best sports, entertainment, talk, and
commercial-free music, SiriusXM offers premium data services that work in conjunction
with compatible navigation systems. SiriusXM Travel Link brings a wealth of useful
information into your vehicle and right to your fingertips.
• Fuel Prices — Check local gas and diesel prices in your area and route to the station of
your choice.
• Movie Listings — Check local movie theatres and listings in your area and route to the
theater of your choice.
• Sports Scores — In-game and final scores as well as weekly schedules.
• Weather — Check variety of local and national weather information from radar maps to
current and 5-day forecast.
SiriusXM Travel Link feature is completely integrated into your vehicle. A few minutes
after you start your vehicle, Travel Link information arrives and updates in the background.
You can access the information whenever you like, with no waiting.
To access SiriusXM Travel Link, press “Apps” button on the touchscreen, then press the
“SiriusXM Travel Link” button on the touchscreen.
NOTE:
SiriusXM Travel Link requires a subscription, sold separately after the five (5) year trial
subscription included with your vehicle purchase.
SiriusXM Travel Link is only available in the United States.
133
ELECTRONICS
UCONNECT 8.4/8.4 NAV VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS
Introducing Uconnect
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these helpful quick tips. It provides the key
Voice Commands and tips you need to know to control your Uconnect system.
If you see the NAV icon on the bottom bar, or in the Apps menus, of your touchscreen, you
have the Uconnect 8.4 NAV system. If not, you have a Uconnect 8.4 system.
Get Started
All you need to control your Uconnect system with your voice are the buttons on your
steering wheel.
1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device and feature compatibility and to
find phone pairing instructions.
2. Reduce background noise. Wind noise and passenger conversations are examples of
noise that may impact recognition.
3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while facing straight ahead. The microphone is located in the headliner and aimed at the driver.
4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first push either the VR or Phone
button, wait until after the beep, then say your Voice Command.
5. You can interrupt the help message or system prompts by pushing the VR or Phone
button and saying a Voice Command from current category.
Uconnect Phone Button
, Push to initiate, answer, or end a phone call.
Uconnect Voice Recognition Button
.
1. Short Press: Push and release the VR
button to begin Radio, Climate, Navigation, and other embedded functions.
After you hear the single beep, say a
command.
2. Long Press: Push and hold continuously
for a few seconds, then release the VR
button for Siri functions. After you hear
the familiar Siri "double beep," say a
command.
Phone Hang Up Button, Push to end a call.
134
Uconnect VR And Phone Buttons
1 — Uconnect Phone Button
2 — Uconnect Voice Recognition Button
3 — Phone Hang Up Button
ELECTRONICS
Basic Voice Commands
The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any point while using your Uconnect
system.
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say…
• Cancel to stop a current voice session
• Help to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands
• Repeat to listen to the system prompts again
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice recognition system’s status. Cues
appear on the top of the touchscreen.
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV
135
ELECTRONICS
Radio
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or SiriusXM Satellite Radio stations you would
like to hear. (Subscription or included SiriusXM Satellite Radio trial required.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say…
• Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM
• Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1
TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or want to learn a Voice Command, push
the VR button
and say “Help.” The system will provide you with a list of commands.
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Radio
136
ELECTRONICS
Media
Uconnect offers connections via USB, Bluetooth and auxiliary ports (If Equipped). Voice
operation is only available for connected USB and AUX devices. (Remote CD player
optional and not available on all vehicles.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say one of the following commands and follow
the prompts to switch your media source or choose an artist.
• Change source to Bluetooth
• Change source to AUX
• Change source to USB
• Play artist Beethoven; Play album Greatest Hits; Play song Moonlight Sonata; Play
genre Classical
TIP: Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to see all of the music on your USB
device. Your Voice Command must match exactly how the artist, album, song and genre
information is displayed.
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Media
137
ELECTRONICS
Phone
Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy with Uconnect. When the Phonebook button is illuminated on your touchscreen, your system is ready. Check
UconnectPhone.com for mobile phone compatibility and pairing instructions.
Push the Phone button
. After the beep, say one of the following commands…
• Call John Smith
• Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system prompts
• Redial (call previous outgoing phone number)
• Call back (call previous incoming phone number)
TIP: When providing a Voice Command, push the Phone button
and say “Call,”
then pronounce the name exactly as it appears in your phone book. When a contact has
multiple phone numbers, you can say “Call John Smith work.”
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Phone
138
ELECTRONICS
Climate (8.4/8.4 NAV)
Too hot? Too cold? Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free and keep everyone comfortable
while you keep moving ahead. (If vehicle is equipped with climate control.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say one of the following commands:
• Set driver temperature to 70 degrees
• Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees
TIP: Voice Command for Climate may only be used to adjust the interior temperature of
your vehicle. Voice Command will not work to adjust the heated seats or steering wheel if
equipped.
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Climate
139
ELECTRONICS
Navigation (8.4 NAV)
The Uconnect navigation feature helps you save time and become more productive when
you know exactly how to get to where you want to go. (Navigation is optional on the
Uconnect 8.4 system.)
1. To enter a destination, push the VR button
. After the beep, say:
• For the 8.4 Uconnect System, say: “Enter state.”
• For the 8.4 NAV Uconnect System, say: “Find address 800 Chrysler Drive Auburn
Hills, Michigan.”
2. Then follow the system prompts.
TIP: To start a POI search, push the VR button
coffee shop.”
. After the beep, say: “Find nearest
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Navigation
SiriusXM Guardian (8.4 NAV) — If Equipped
WARNING!
Some SiriusXM Guardian services, including SOS Call and Roadside Assistance Call
will NOT work without an operable LTE (voice/data) or 3G or 4G (data) network
connection compatible with your device.
140
ELECTRONICS
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by the subscriber.
An included trial and/or subscription is required to take advantage of the SiriusXM
Guardian services in the next section of this guide. To register with SiriusXM Guardian,
press the Apps button on the 8.4-inch touchscreen to get started.
NOTE:
SiriusXM Guardian is available only on equipped vehicles purchased within the continental United States, Alaska and Hawaii. Services can only be used where coverage is
available; see coverage map for details.
SOS Call
Theft Alarm Notification
Remote Door Lock/Unlock
Send & Go
Vehicle Finder
Stolen Vehicle Assistance
Remote Vehicle Start**
Remote Horn & Lights
Roadside Assistance Call
Vehicle Health Reports**
Vehicle Health Alert**
Performance Pages Plus**
**If vehicle is equipped.
Register (8.4 NAV)
To unlock the full potential of SiriusXM Guardian in your vehicle, you must activate your
SiriusXM Guardian services.
1. Press the Apps icon on the bottom of your in-vehicle touchscreen.
2. Select the Activate Services icon from your list of apps.
3. Select “Customer Care” to speak with a SiriusXM Guardian Customer Care agent who
will activate services in your vehicle, or select “Enter Email” to activate on the web.
For further information, please visit siriusxm.com/guardian.
141
ELECTRONICS
Vehicle Health Report/Alert (8.4 NAV)
Your vehicle will send you a monthly email report, which summarizes the performance of
your vehicle’s key systems so you can stay on top of your vehicle’s maintenance needs.
Your vehicle will also send you Vehicle Health Alerts when it detects issues with its key
systems that need your attention. For further information go to the Owner Site website
(owners.dodge.com, owners.chrysler.com, or owners.jeep.com).
Mobile App (8.4 NAV)
You’re only a few steps away from using remote commands and playing your favorite music
in your car.
To use the SiriusXM Guardian App:
• Download the SiriusXM Guardian App to
your mobile device.
• Press the Info button on the navigation
bar at the bottom of the app for Vehicle
Info.
• Press the Remote button on the navigation bar at the bottom of the app to
Lock/Unlock, Remote Start, and activate
your horn and lights remotely.
• Press the Location button on the navigation bar at the bottom of the app to bring
up a map to locate your vehicle or send a
location to your vehicle’s navigation system.
Mobile App
• Press the Settings button in the upper left corner of the app to bring up app settings
and access the Assist Call Centers.
NOTE:
For further information please visit DriveUconnect.com.
142
ELECTRONICS
SiriusXM Travel Link (8.4 NAV)
Need to find a gas station, view local movie listings, check a sports score or the 5 - day
weather forecast? SiriusXM Travel Link is a suite of services that brings a wealth of
information right to your Uconnect 8.4 NAV system. (Not available for 8.4 system or
vehicles sold in the Canadian market.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say one of the following commands:
• Show fuel prices
• Show 5 - day weather forecast
• Show extended weather
TIP: Traffic alerts are not accessible with Voice Command.
SiriusXM Travel Link
143
ELECTRONICS
Apple CarPlay — If Equipped
Apple CarPlay allows you to use your voice to interact with Siri through your vehicle’s voice
recognition system, and use your smartphone’s data plan to project your iPhone and a
number of its apps onto your Uconnect touchscreen. Connect your iPhone 5, or higher, to
one of the media USB ports, using the factory-provided Lightning cable, and press the
new CarPlay icon that replaces your “Phone” icon on the main menu bar to begin Apple
CarPlay. Press and hold the VR button on the steering wheel, or press and hold the
“Home” button within Apple CarPlay, to activate Siri, which recognizes natural voice
commands to use a list of your iPhone’s features:
• Phone
• Music
• Messages
• Maps
• Additional Apps
Refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual
Supplement for further information.
Apple CarPlay
144
ELECTRONICS
Android Auto — If Equipped
Android Auto allows you to use your voice to interact with Android’s best-in-class speech
technology through your vehicle’s voice recognition system, and use your smartphone’s
data plan to project your Android powered smartphone and a number of its apps onto your
Uconnect touchscreen. Connect your Android 5.0 (Lollipop), or higher, to one of the
media USB ports, using the factory-provided USB cable, and press the new Android Auto
icon that replaces your “Phone” icon on the main menu bar to begin Android Auto. Push
and hold the VR button on the steering wheel, or press and hold the “Microphone” icon
within Android Auto, to activate Android’s VR, which recognizes natural voice commands,
to use a list of your smartphone’s features:
• Maps
• Music
• Phone
• Text Messages
• Additional Apps
Refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual
Supplement for further information.
Android Auto
145
ELECTRONICS
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped
in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada licenseexempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Additional Information
© 2017 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and Uconnect are registered trademarks and
Mopar Owner Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. Android is a trademark of Google Inc.
SiriusXM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc.
Uconnect System Support:
• U.S. residents visit DriveUconnect.com or call: 1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day
7 days a week)
• Canadian residents visit DriveUconnect.ca or call: 1-800-465-2001 (English) or
1-800-387-9983 (French)
SiriusXM Guardian services support, call:
1-844-796-4827
146
ELECTRONICS
UCONNECT PHONE
Uconnect Phone (Bluetooth Hands Free Calling)
Uconnect 5.0 Phone Menu
1 — Call/Redial/Hold
2 — Mobile Phone Signal Strength
3 — Currently Paired Mobile Phone
4 — Mobile Phone Battery Life
5 — Mute Microphone
6 — Transfer To/From Uconnect System
7 — Uconnect Phone Settings Menu
8 — Text Messaging
9 — Direct Dial Pad
10 — Recent Call Log
11 — Browse Phone Book (Contains 9-1-1)
12 — End Call
147
ELECTRONICS
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Phone Menu
1 — Favorite Contacts
2 — Mobile Phone Battery Life
3 — Currently Paired Mobile Phone
4 — Mobile Phone Signal Strength
5 — Mute Microphone
6 — Transfer To/From Uconnect System
7 — Conference Call*
8 — Phone Settings
9 — Text Messaging**
10 — Direct Dial Pad
11 — Recent Call Log
12 — Browse Phone Book Entries (Contains SOS Call)
13 — End Call
14 — Call/Redial/Hold
15 — Do Not Disturb
16 — Reply with Text Message
* — Conference call feature only available on GSM mobile devices
** — Text messaging feature not available on all mobile phones (requires
Bluetooth MAP profile)
The Uconnect Phone feature enables you to place and receive hands-free mobile phone
calls. Drivers can also place mobile phone calls using their voice or by using the buttons
on the touchscreen (see Voice Command section).
The hands-free calling feature is made possible through Bluetooth technology — the
global standard that enables different electronic devices to connect to each other
wirelessly.
If the Uconnect Phone Button
Uconnect Phone features.
148
exists on your steering wheel, you then have the
ELECTRONICS
NOTE:
• The Uconnect Phone requires a mobile phone equipped with the Bluetooth HandsFree Profile, Version 1.0 or higher.
• Most mobile phones/devices are compatible with the Uconnect system, however some
mobile phones/devices may not be equipped with all of the required features to utilize
all of the Uconnect system features.
• For Uconnect Customer Care:
• U.S. residents visit UconnectPhone.com or call 1-877-855-8400.
Pairing (Wirelessly Connecting) Your Mobile Phone To The Uconnect System
Mobile phone pairing is the process of establishing a wireless connection between a
cellular phone and the Uconnect system.
NOTE:
• To use the Uconnect Phone feature, you first must determine if your mobile phone and
software are compatible with the Uconnect system. Please visit UconnectPhone.com
for complete mobile phone compatibility information.
• Mobile phone pairing is not available while the vehicle is in motion.
• A maximum of ten mobile phones can be paired to the Uconnect system.
Start Pairing Procedure On The Radio
Uconnect 5.0:
1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON
position.
2. Press the “Phone” button.
3. Select “Settings.”
4. Select “Paired Phones.”
5. Select “Add device.”
• Uconnect Phone will display an “In
progress” screen while the system is
connecting.
Uconnect 5.0
149
ELECTRONICS
Uconnect 8.4, 8.4 NAV:
1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON
position.
2. Press the “Phone” button in the Menu
Bar on the touchscreen.
3. Select “Settings.”
4. Select “Paired Phones.”
5. Select “Add device.”
• Uconnect Phone will display an “In
progress” screen while the system is
connecting.
Uconnect 8.4 & 8.4 NAV
Pair Your iPhone:
To search for available devices on your
Bluetooth enabled iPhone:
1. Press the Settings button.
2. Select Bluetooth.
• Ensure the Bluetooth feature is enabled. Once enabled, the mobile
phone will begin to search for
Bluetooth connections.
3. When your mobile phone finds the
Uconnect system, select “Uconnect”.
Bluetooth On/Uconnect Device
Complete The iPhone Pairing Procedure:
1. When prompted on the mobile phone,
accept the connection request from
Uconnect Phone.
NOTE:
Some mobile phones will require you to
enter the PIN number.
Pairing Request
150
ELECTRONICS
Select The iPhone's Priority Level
When the pairing process has successfully completed, the system will prompt you to
choose whether or not this is your favorite mobile phone. Selecting “Yes” will make this
mobile phone the highest priority. This mobile phone will take precedence over other
paired mobile phones within range and will connect to the Uconnect system automatically
when entering the vehicle. Only one mobile phone and/or one Bluetooth audio device can
be connected to the Uconnect system at a time. If “No” is selected, simply select
“Uconnect” from the mobile phone/audio device Bluetooth screen, and the Uconnect
system will reconnect to the Bluetooth device.
Pair Your Android Device:
To search for available devices on your
Bluetooth enabled Android Device:
1. Push the Menu button.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select Connections.
4. Turn Bluetooth setting to “On.”
• Ensure the Bluetooth feature is enabled. Once enabled, the mobile
phone will begin to search for
Bluetooth connections.
Uconnect Device
5. Once your mobile phone finds the Uconnect system, select “Uconnect”.
• You may be prompted by your mobile phone to download the phonebook, check “Do
Not Ask Again” to automatically download the phonebook. This is so you can make
calls by saying the name of your contact.
Complete The Android Pairing Procedure:
1. Confirm the passkey shown on the mobile phone matches the passkey shown
on the Uconnect system then accept the
Bluetooth pairing request.
NOTE:
Some mobile phones require the PIN to be
entered manually, enter the PIN number
shown on the Uconnect screen.
Pairing Request
151
ELECTRONICS
Select The Android Mobile Phone's Priority Level
When the pairing process has successfully completed, the system will prompt you to
choose whether or not this is your favorite mobile phone. Selecting “Yes” will make this
mobile phone the highest priority. This mobile phone will take precedence over other
paired mobile phones within range and will connect to the Uconnect system automatically
when entering the vehicle. Only one mobile phone and/or one Bluetooth audio device can
be connected to the Uconnect system at a time. If “No” is selected, simply select
“Uconnect” from the mobile phone/audio device Bluetooth screen, and the Uconnect
system will reconnect to the Bluetooth device.
You are now ready to make hands-free calls. Press the Uconnect “Phone” button
your steering wheel to begin.
on
NOTE:
Refer to UconnectPhone.com website for additional information on mobile phone pairing
and for a list of compatible phones.
Common Phone Commands (Examples)
• “Call John Smith”
• “Call John Smith mobile”
• “Dial 1 248 555 1212”
• “Redial”
Mute (Or Unmute) Microphone During Call
• During a call, press the “Mute” button on the Phone main screen to mute and unmute
the call.
Transfer Ongoing Call Between Handset And Vehicle
• During an on-going call, press the “Transfer” button on the Phone main screen to
transfer an on-going call between handset and vehicle.
Phonebook
The Uconnect system will automatically sync your phonebook from your paired phone, if
this feature is supported by your phone. Phonebook contacts are updated each time that
the phone is connected. If your phone book entries do not appear, check the settings on
your phone. Some phones require you to enable this feature manually.
• Your phonebook can be browsed on the Uconnect system touchscreen, but editing can
only be done on your phone. To browse, press the “Phone” button on the touchscreen,
then the “Phonebook” button on the touchscreen.
Favorite phonebook entries can be saved as Favorites for quicker access. Favorites are
shown at the top of the main phone screen.
152
ELECTRONICS
Voice Command Tips
• Speaking complete names (i.e; Call John Doe vs. Call John) will result in greater system
accuracy.
• You can “link” commands together for faster results. Say “Call John Doe, mobile,” for
example.
• If you are listening to available voice command options, you do not have to listen to the
button on the
entire list. When you hear the command that you need, push the
steering wheel, wait for the beep and say your command.
Changing The Volume
• Start a dialogue by pushing the Phone button
example, "Help".
, then say a command. For
• Use the radio VOLUME/MUTE rotary knob to adjust the volume to a comfortable level
while the Uconnect system is speaking.
NOTE:
The volume setting for Uconnect is different than the audio system.
NOTE:
To access help, push the Uconnect Phone button
"help." Push the Uconnect Phone Pickup button
"cancel" to cancel the help session.
on the steering wheel and say
or the VR button
and say
Using Do Not Disturb
With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifications from incoming calls and texts, allowing
you to keep your eyes on the road and hands on the wheel. For your convenience, there is
a counter display to keep track of your missed calls and text messages while you were
using Do Not Disturb.
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a text message, a call or both, when declining
an incoming call and send it to voicemail.
Automatic reply messages can be:
• “I am driving right now, I will get back to you shortly.”
• Create a custom auto reply message up to 160 characters.
While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be selected so you can still place a second
call without being interrupted by incoming calls.
NOTE:
• Only the beginning of your custom message will be seen on the touchscreen.
• Reply with text message is not compatible with iPhones.
• Auto reply with text message is only available on phones that supporting Bluetooth MAP.
153
ELECTRONICS
Incoming Text Messages
After pairing your Uconnect system with a Bluetooth enabled mobile device with the
Message Access Profile (MAP), the Uconnect system can announce a new incoming text
message and read it to you over the vehicle’s audio system.
NOTE:
Only incoming text messages received during the current ignition cycle can be viewed/
read.
To enable incoming text messaging:
iPhone
1. Press the settings button on the mobile phone.
2. Select Bluetooth.
• Ensure Bluetooth is enabled, and the mobile phone is paired to the Uconnect
system.
3. Select
located under DEVICES next to Uconnect.
4. Turn “Show Notifications” to on.
Enable iPhone Incoming Text Messages
154
ELECTRONICS
Android Devices
1. Push the Menu button on the mobile phone.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select Connections.
4. Turn “Show Notifications” to on.
• A pop up will appear asking you to accept a request for permission to connect to
your messages. Select “Don’t ask again” and press OK.
NOTE:
All incoming text messages received during
the current ignition cycle will be deleted
from the Uconnect system when the
ignition is turned to the OFF position.
Enable Android Device Incoming Text
Messages
Helpful Tips And Common Questions To Improve Bluetooth Performance With
Your Uconnect System
Mobile Phone won’t reconnect to system after pairing:
• Set mobile phone to auto-connect or trusted device in mobile phone Bluetooth settings
(Blackberry devices).
• Perform a factory reset on your mobile phone. Refer to your mobile phone manufacturer
or cellular provider for instructions.
• Many mobile phones do not automatically reconnect after being restarted (hard
reboot). Your mobile phone can still be connected manually. Close all applications that
may be operating (refer to mobile phone manufacturer’s instructions), and follow
“Pairing (Wirelessly Connecting) Your Mobile Phone To The Uconnect System”.
Mobile Phone won’t pair to system:
• Perform a hard reset in the mobile phone by removing the battery (if removable — see
your mobile phone’s owner manual).
• Delete pairing history in mobile phone and Uconnect system; usually found in phone’s
Bluetooth connection settings.
155
ELECTRONICS
• Verify you are selecting “Uconnect” in the discovered Bluetooth devices on your mobile
phone.
• If your vehicle system generates a pin code the default is 0000.
Mobile Phonebook didn’t download:
• Check “Do not ask again,” then accept the “phonebook download” request on your
mobile phone.
• Up to 5,000 contact names with four numbers per contact will transfer to the
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV system phonebook.
• Up to 2,000 contact names with six numbers per contact will transfer to the Uconnect
5.0 system phonebook.
Can’t make a conference call:
• CDMA (Code-Division Multiple Access) carriers do not support conference calling.
Refer to your mobile phone user’s manual for further information.
Making calls while connected to AUX:
• Plugging in your mobile phone to AUX while connected to Bluetooth will disable
Hands-Free Calling. Do not make calls while your mobile phone is plugged into the AUX
jack.
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS
The steering wheel audio controls are located on the rear surface of the steering wheel.
Right Switch
• Push the switch up or down to increase
or decrease the volume.
• Push the button in the center to change
modes AM/FM/SXM.
Left Switch
• Push the switch up or down to search for
the next listenable station.
• Push the button in the center to select
the next preset station.
Steering Wheel Audio Controls
156
ELECTRONICS
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
The instrument cluster display features an interactive driver display that is located in the
instrument cluster. Pushing the controls on the left side of the steering wheel allows the
driver to select vehicle information and Personal Settings. For additional information,
refer to “Programmable Features” in this guide.
• Push the up button to scroll upward
through the main menus (Speedometer, mph/km/h, Vehicle Info, Terrain,
Driver Assist, Fuel Economy, Trip A,
Trip B, Audio, Stored Messages, Screen
Set Up).
• Push the down button to scroll downward through the main menu and submenus (Speedometer, mph/km/h, Vehicle Info, Terrain, Driver Assist, Fuel
Economy, Trip A, Trip B, Audio, Stored
Messages, Screen Set Up).
• Push the right button to access the information screens or submenu screens of a
main menu item.
Instrument Cluster Display Controls
• Push the left button to access the information screens or submenu screens of a main
menu item.
• Push the OK button to access/select the information screens or submenu screens of a
main menu item. Push and hold the OK button for two seconds to reset displayed/
selected features that can be reset.
PERFORMANCE FEATURES
Overview Of Performance Features
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the Uconnect features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
157
ELECTRONICS
The Performance Features include the following:
• Best
• Last
0-60 MPH (0-100 km/h) Timer
• Current
• Reaction Timer
• Best
• Last
0-100 MPH (0-161 km/h) Timer
• Current
• Reaction Timer
• Best
• Last
1/8 Mile (200 meters) Timer
• Current
• Reaction Timer
• Best
• Last
1/4 Mile (400 meters) Timer
• Current
• Reaction Timer
• Distance
Braking Distance
• From Speed
Current G-Forces
Peak G-Forces
Lap Timer
• Will list the last 5 laps with the best lap
Lap History
highlighted in green.
Top Speed
The following describes each feature and its operation:
0-60 MPH (0-100 km/h)
When selected, this screen displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go from 0 to
60 MPH (0 to 100 km/h) within 10 seconds.
• The feature will “ready” when the vehicle speed is at 0 MPH (0 km/h). The word
“READY” will flash when conditions are met for the event to begin.
• Dashes will display if the vehicle fails to reach 60 MPH (100 km/h) in less then
10 seconds.
• To clear the vehicle's best, last, and current 0-60 MPH (0-100 km/h) time, push and
hold the OK button for two seconds.
158
ELECTRONICS
0-100 MPH (0-161 km/h)
When selected, this screen displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go from 0 to
100 MPH (0 to 161 km/h) within 15 seconds.
• The feature will “ready” when the vehicle speed is at 0 MPH (0 km/h). The word
“READY” will flash when conditions are met for the event to begin.
• Dashes will display if the vehicle fails to reach 0 to 100 MPH (0 to 161 km/h) in less
then 15 seconds.
• To clear the vehicle's best, last and current 0 to 100 MPH (0 to 161 km/h) time, push
and hold the OK button for two seconds.
Reaction Timer
Press the OK button to engage Countdown Timer. The time it takes for the wheel speed to
not equal 0 MPH, after the word GO, is your reaction time. If wheel speed is greater than
0 MPH before 'GO', the reaction time will be a negative time.
NOTE:
The Reaction Time, MPH, 1/8 Mile, and 1/4 Mile timers will be “ready” when the vehicle
is at 0 MPH (0 km/h).
1/8 Mile (200 Meters)
When selected, this screen displays the time it takes the vehicle to travel 1/8 mile within
15 seconds and the vehicle's speed when it reaches 1/8 mile.
• The feature will “ready” when the vehicle is at 0 MPH (0 km/h). The word “READY” will
flash when conditions are met for the event to begin.
• Dashes will display if the vehicle fails to reach 1/8 mile (200 meters) in less then
15 seconds.
• To clear the vehicle's best 1/8 mile (200 meters) run, push and hold the OK button for
five seconds.
1/4 Mile (400 Meters)
When selected, this screen displays the time it takes the vehicle to travel 1/4 mile within
25 seconds and the vehicle's speed when it reaches 1/4 mile (400 meters).
• The feature will “ready” when the vehicle is at 0 MPH (0 km/h). The word “READY” will
flash when conditions are met for the event to begin.
• Dashes will display if the vehicle fails to reach 1/4 mile (400 meters) in less then 25
seconds.
• To clear the vehicle's best 1/4 mile (400 meters) run, push and hold the OK button for
two seconds.
159
ELECTRONICS
Braking Distance
When selected, this screen displays the vehicle's braking distance, and the speed at which
the brake pedal was pushed.
• This feature will only function when applying the brakes at speeds above 30 MPH
(48 km/h).
• Engaging the parking brake will disable this feature.
• The word “READY” will display when conditions are met for the event to begin.
• The distance and speed measurements display while the event is taking place.
• The distance measurement will be aborted if the brake pedal is released before the
vehicle comes to a complete stop.
• Pushing and holding the OK button will clear the current and last run values.
Current G-Force
When selected, this screen displays the current G-Force (lateral and longitudinal) that
displays the directions of the forces.
Peak G-Force
When selected, this screen displays all four G-Force values (two lateral and two longitudinal).
• When a force greater than zero is measured, the display will update the value as it
climbs. As the G-Force falls, the peak forces will continue to display.
• Push and hold the OK button to clear the peak force values.
Lap Timer
When selected, the Lap Timer page will show the timer always at 0:00.00 with the
previous Best and Last time data (unless the driver has cleared it via hold to Reset).
• Pushing the OK button will start “current” timer from 0:00.0.
• When the OK button is pushed, the times are updated accordingly.
• As soon as the driver exits the Lap Timer pages, the “current” timer will stop and the
time will be reset to 0:00.00.
• If the driver stays on the Lap Timer pages, the “current” timer will reset to 0:00.0 when
ignition is placed in the off position, or ignition placed in the ON position (or will roll
over at 59:59.99 if ever possible).
• Each time the driver pushes the OK button for a Lap that current time populates, the
Last time and also populates the 1st (top) space on the Timer History page the current
time resets to 0:00.0 at every push of the OK button.
• The timer will stop when the driver navigates away from this page.
160
ELECTRONICS
Lap History
When selected, this screen displays the Lap History, and will color highlight the time that
is the best time from the Timer Page.
• Each time the driver pushes the OK button (while on the Lap Timer page) the current
Lap Time populates the 1st spot and the rest of the data shifts down.
• Color will indicate the time that is the best time from the Timer Page.
• Holding the OK button only resets the page you are on.
• Lap History page is a static display of lap times only.
Top Speed
When selected, this screen displays the Top Speed since last reset:
• Populates a top speed from first drive cycle and every time that speed is exceeded that
number is stored here unless/until the driver resets the screen.
• Latching over ignition cycles.
• Units will change with the global change in units.
For further information, and applicable warnings and cautions, please refer to your
Owner’s Manual at www.dodge.com/en/owners/manuals/.
PROGRAMMABLE FEATURES
Uconnect Customer Programmable Features
The Uconnect system allows you to access Customer Programmable feature settings such
as Display, Units, Voice, Clock, Safety & Driving Assistance, Lights, Doors & Locks,
Auto-On Comfort, Engine Off Options, Audio, Phone/Bluetooth, SiriusXM Setup, Restore
Settings, Clear Personal Data, System Information, and Compass Settings (5.0 Radio
Only) through buttons on the touchscreen.
NOTE:
If equipped with the Super Track Pak option please refer to the “Drive Mode Supplement”
for further descriptions of these modes.
161
ELECTRONICS
• Press the “Controls” button located near the bottom of the touchscreen, then press the
“Settings” button on the touchscreen to access the Settings screen. When making a
selection, scroll up or down until the preferred setting is highlighted, then press and
release the preferred setting until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing
that setting has been selected. The following feature settings are available:
• Display
• Units
• Voice
• Clock
• Safety & Driving Assistance
• Lights
• Doors & Locks
• Auto-On Comfort
• Engine Off Options
• Audio
• Phone/Bluetooth
• SiriusXM Setup
• Restore Settings
• Clear Personal Data
• System Information
• Compass (5.0 Radio Only)
Refer to “Uconnect Settings/Customer Programmable Features” found within “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” located in your Owner's Manual on
www.dodge.com/en/owners/manuals/ for further information.
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER (HomeLink)
• HomeLink replaces up to three hand-held transmitters that operate devices such as
garage door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security systems. The
HomeLink unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt battery.
• The HomeLink buttons that are located in the overhead console or sunvisor designate
the three different HomeLink channels.
• The HomeLink indicator is located in the center of the house icon, to the left of the first
button.
Before You Begin Programming
HomeLink
• Ensure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage before you begin programming.
• For efficient programming and accurate
transmission of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that a new battery
be placed in the hand-held transmitter
of the device that is being programmed
to the HomeLink system.
• To erase the channels, place the ignition
switch into the ON/RUN position, then
Universal Garage Door Opener (HomeLink)
push and hold the two outside
HomeLink buttons (I and III) for up to
20 seconds or until the amber indicator flashes.
162
ELECTRONICS
NOTE:
• Erasing all channels should only be performed when programming HomeLink for the
first time. Do not erase channels when programming additional buttons.
• If you have any problems, or require assistance, please call toll-free 1-800-355-3515
or, on the Internet at HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
Programming A Rolling Code
• For programming Garage Door Openers that were manufactured after 1995. These
Garage Door Openers can be identified by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located
where the hanging antenna is attached to the Garage Door Opener. It is NOT the button
that is normally used to open and close the door. The name and color of the button may
vary by manufacturer.
1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink
button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view.
3. Simultaneously push and hold both the HomeLink button you want to program and the
hand-held transmitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator light. The HomeLink indicator
will flash slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink has received the frequency signal
from the hand-held transmitter. Release both buttons after the indicator light changes
from slow to rapid.
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING”
button. This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the
garage door opener motor. Firmly push and release the “LEARN” or “TRAINING”
button.
NOTE:
You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next step after the LEARN button has been
6. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed HomeLink button twice (holding the
button for two seconds each time). If the device is plugged in and activates,
programming is complete.
NOTE:
If the device does not activate, push the button a third time (for two seconds) to complete
the training.
7. To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons, repeat each step for each remaining
button. DO NOT erase the channels.
163
ELECTRONICS
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
NOTE:
For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured before 1995.
1. Place the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink
button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink button you want to program while you push and hold the
hand-held transmitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator light. The HomeLink indicator
will flash slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink has received the frequency signal
from the hand-held transmitter. Release both buttons after the indicator light changes
from slow to rapid.
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button and observe the indicator light. If
the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and the garage door
(or device) should activate when the HomeLink button is pushed.
6. To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons, repeat each step for each remaining
button. DO NOT erase the channels.
Using HomeLink
To operate, push and release the programmed HomeLink button. Activation will now occur
for the programmed device (e.g., garage door opener, gate operator, security system, entry
door lock, home/office lighting, etc.). The hand-held transmitter of the device may also be
used at any time.
WARNING!
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are programming the
universal transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people or pets are in the path
of the door or gate.
• Do not run your vehicle in a closed garage or confined area while programming the
transceiver. Exhaust gas from your vehicle contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is
odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous when inhaled and can cause
you and others to be severely injured or killed.
164
ELECTRONICS
POWER OUTLETS
There are two 12 Volt electrical power outlets on this vehicle.
The front 12 Volt power outlet is located on the passenger side of the Center Console
(ICS), and is powered when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position. The outlet can
operate a conventional cigar lighter unit or power accessories designed for use with a
standard power outlet adapter.
Power Outlet — Integrated Center Stack
(ICS) Front
The center console 12 Volt power outlet is powered directly from the battery (power
available at all times). Items plugged into this outlet may discharge the battery and/or
prevent the engine from starting.
Power Outlet — Center Console
165
ELECTRONICS
NOTE:
• Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts (13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the
160 Watt (13 Amp) power rating is exceeded, the fuse protecting the system will need
to be replaced.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do not insert any other object in
the power outlet as this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse. Improper use of the
power outlet can cause damage not covered by your new vehicle warranty.
Power Outlet Fuses
1 — #12 Fuse 20A Yellow Cigar Lighter Integrated Center Stack
2 — #38 Fuse 20A Yellow Power Outlet Center Console
166
UTILITY
TRAILER TOWING WEIGHTS (MAXIMUM TRAILER WEIGHT
RATINGS)
Engine/Transmission
Frontal Area
Max. GTW
(Gross Trailer Wt.)
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
3.6L Automatic
12 sq ft (1.11 sq m)
5.7L Automatic /
12 sq ft (1.11 sq m)
Manual
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds
Max. Tongue Wt.
100 lbs (45 kg)
100 lbs (45 kg)
Trailer towing with the 6.4L or 6.2L Supercharged engine is not recommended.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Rear-Wheel Drive
Recreational towing (with all four wheels on the ground, or using a tow dolly) is NOT
ALLOWED. The only acceptable method for towing this vehicle (behind another vehicle) is
on a vehicle trailer with all four wheels OFF the ground.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
Two-Wheel Drive And All-Wheel Drive
Recreational towing (with all four wheels on the ground, or using a tow dolly) is NOT
ALLOWED. The only acceptable method for towing this vehicle (behind another vehicle) is
on a vehicle trailer with all four wheels OFF the ground.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission and/or transfer case damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
167
SRT
DRIVE MODES
Your SRT vehicle is equipped with a SRT Drive Mode feature. This feature gives the driver
control over the systems in the vehicle which affect its performance, enabling the driver
to tune it for desired driving scenarios. Below are the modes of operation:
NOTE:
Refer to “SRT Drive Modes” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” in the Owner’s
Manual on www.dodge.com/en/owners/manuals for further descriptions of these modes.
Launch Mode — If Equipped
This vehicle is equipped with a Launch Mode system that is designed to allow the driver
to achieve maximum vehicle acceleration in a straight line. Launch Mode is a form of
traction control that manages tire slip while launching the vehicle. This feature is
intended for use during race events on a closed course where consistent quarter mile and
zero to sixty times are desired. The system is not intended to compensate for lack of driver
experience or familiarity with the race track. Use of this feature in low traction (cold, wet,
gravel, etc.) conditions may result in excess wheel slip outside of this system’s control,
resulting in an aborted launch.
NOTE:
Launch mode is not available within the first 500 miles of engine break-in.
Preconditions:
• Launch Mode should not be used on public roads. Always check track conditions and
the surrounding area.
• Launch mode is not available within the first 500 miles of engine break-in.
• Launch Mode should only be used when the engine and transmission are at operating
temperature.
• Launch Mode is intended to be used on dry, paved road surfaces only. Use on slippery
or loose surfaces may cause damage to vehicle components and is not recommended.
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
Launch Mode is only available when the following procedure is followed:
1. Push the LAUNCH button on the center stack switch bank.
NOTE:
Pushing the SRT button on the center stack or pressing the “Apps” button on the
touchscreen are two other options to access launch mode features. Please refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” in your Owner’s Manual
on www.dodge.com/en/owners/manuals, or the “Drive Modes Supplement”, for further
information.
2. Slide the RPM slider bar on the touchscreen. This screen will allow you to adjust your
launch RPM’s for optimum launch/traction.
3. Press the “Activate Launch Mode” button on the touchscreen.
168
SRT
4. Make sure the vehicle is not moving.
5. Make sure the steering wheel is pointing straight.
6. Hold the brake and make sure the vehicle is in “DRIVE”.
7. While holding the brake, rapidly apply the accelerator pedal to wide open throttle. The
engine speed will hold at the RPM that was set in the “Launch RPM Set-up” screen.
NOTE:
Messages will appear in the instrument cluster to inform the driver if one or more of the
above conditions have not been met.
8. When conditions four through seven have been met, the instrument cluster display will
read “Launch Ready Release Brake”.
9. Keep the vehicle pointed straight.
Launch mode will be active until the vehicle reaches 62 mph (100 km/h), at which point
the ESC system will return to its current ESC mode.
Launch mode will abort before launch completion, display “Launch Aborted” in the
cluster under any the following conditions:
• The accelerator pedal is released during launch.
• The ESC system detects that the vehicle is no longer moving in a straight line.
• The “ESC OFF” button is pushed to change the system to another mode.
NOTE:
After launch mode has been aborted, ESC will return to its current ESC mode.
Manual Transmission — If Equipped
Vehicles with a manual transmission have an adjustable launch RPM controlled through
the Uconnect system.
Launch Mode is only available when the following procedure is followed:
1. Push the LAUNCH button on the center stack switch bank.
NOTE:
Pushing the SRT button on the center stack or pressing the “Apps” button on the
touchscreen are two other options to access launch mode features. Please refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” in your Owner’s Manual
on www.dodge.com/en/owners/manuals, or the “Drive Modes Supplement”, for further
information.
2. Slide the RPM slider bar on the touchscreen. This screen will allow you to adjust your
launch RPM’s for optimum launch/traction.
3. Press the “Activate Launch Mode” button on the touchscreen.
4. Make sure the vehicle is not moving.
5. Make sure the steering wheel is pointing straight.
6. Fully depress the clutch pedal and make sure the vehicle is in first gear.
169
SRT
7. While holding the clutch depressed, rapidly apply the accelerator pedal to wide open
throttle. The engine speed will hold at the pre-selected launch RPM. The engine speed
will hold at the RPM that was set in the “Launch RPM Set-up” screen.
NOTE:
Messages will appear in the instrument cluster to inform the driver if one or more of the
above conditions have not been met.
8. When conditions four through seven have been met, the instrument cluster display will
read “Launch Ready Release Clutch”. Release the clutch quickly and continue to hold
wide open throttle to launch execute shifts. Refer to “Manual Transmission – If
Equipped” in “Starting And Operating” in the Owner’s Manual on
www.dodge.com/en/owners/manuals for further information.
Release the clutch and continue to hold wide open throttle to launch.
9. Keep the vehicle pointed straight.
Launch mode will be active until the vehicle reaches 62 mph (100 km/h), at which point
the ESC system will return to its current ESC mode.
Launch mode will abort before launch completion, display “Launch Aborted” in the
cluster and return to ESC Full ON under any the following conditions:
• The brake is applied during launch.
• The ESC system detects that the vehicle is no longer moving in a straight line.
• The “ESC OFF” button is pushed to change the ESC system to another mode.
NOTE:
After launch mode has been aborted, ESC will return to its current ESC mode.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to shift when the drive wheels are spinning and do not have traction.
Damage to the transmission may occur.
170
SRT
SRT PERFORMANCE FEATURES
Instrument Cluster Display
• The instrument cluster display can be used to view or change the following SRT
Performance Features. Push the up or down arrow button until SRT Performance
displays in the instrument cluster display, then push the right arrow button. Follow the
prompts to view and set your desired settings. Push the left arrow button to scroll back
to a previous menu or sub menu.
1 — Instrument Cluster Display Controls
SRT Performance Sub Menu Items
•
•
•
•
•
0-60 MPH (0-100 km/h) Duration
0-100 MPH (0-161 km/h) Duration
1/8 Mile Duration
1/4 Mile Duration
Braking Distance
•
•
•
•
•
Current G-Force
Peak G-Force
Lap Timer
Lap History
Top Speed
The following describes each feature and its operation:
0-60 MPH (0-100 km/h) Duration
When selected, this screen displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go from 0 to
60 MPH (0 to 100 km/h) within 10 seconds.
• The feature will “ready” when the vehicle speed is at 0 MPH (0 km/h). The word
“READY” will flash when conditions are met for the event to begin.
• Dashes will display if the vehicle fails to reach 60 MPH (100 km/h) in less then
10 seconds.
• The time will continue to display until the OK button is pushed.
171
SRT
• Pushing the OK button will clear the current run time and display the vehicle's best
0-60 MPH (0-100 km/h) time.
• To clear the vehicle's best 0-60 MPH (0-100 km/h) time, push and hold the OK button
for five seconds.
0-100 MPH (0-161 km/h) Duration
When selected, this screen displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go from 0 to
100 MPH (0 to 161 km/h) within 15 seconds.
• The feature will “ready” when the vehicle speed is at 0 MPH (0 km/h). The word
“READY” will flash when conditions are met for the event to begin.
• Dashes will display if the vehicle fails to reach 0 to 100 MPH (0 to 161 km/h) in less
then 15 seconds.
• The time will continue to display until the OK button is pushed.
• Pushing the OK button will clear the current run time and display the vehicle's best 0 to
100 MPH (0 to 161 km/h) time.
• To clear the vehicle's best 0 to 100 MPH (0 to 161 km/h) time, push and hold the OK
button for five seconds.
1/8 Mile Duration
When selected, this screen displays the time it takes the vehicle to travel 1/8 mile within
15 seconds and the vehicle's speed when it reaches 1/8 mile.
• The feature will “ready” when the vehicle is at 0 MPH (0 km/h). The word “READY” will
flash when conditions are met for the event to begin.
• Dashes will display if the vehicle fails to reach 1/8 mile in less then 15 seconds.
• The time and speed will continue to display until the OK button is pushed.
• Pushing the OK button will clear the current run and display the vehicle's best 1/8 mile
run.
• To clear the vehicle's best 1/8 mile run, push and hold the OK button for five seconds.
1/4 Mile Duration
When selected, this screen displays the time it takes the vehicle to travel 1/4 mile within
25 seconds and the vehicle's speed when it reaches 1/4 mile.
• The feature will “ready” when the vehicle is at 0 MPH (0 km/h). The word “READY” will
flash when conditions are met for the event to begin.
• Dashes will display if the vehicle fails to reach 1/4 mile in less then 25 seconds.
• The time and speed will continue to display until the OK button is pushed.
• Pushing the OK button will clear the current run and display the vehicle's best 1/4 mile
run.
• To clear the vehicle's best 1/4 mile run, push and hold the OK button for five seconds.
172
SRT
Braking Distance
When selected, this screen displays the vehicle's braking distance and the speed at which
the brake pedal was depressed.
• This feature will only function when applying the brakes at speeds above 30 MPH
(48 km/h).
• Engaging the parking brake will disable this feature.
• The word “READY” will display when conditions are met for the event to begin.
• The distance and speed measurements display while the event is taking place.
• The distance measurement will be aborted if the brake pedal is released before the
vehicle comes to a complete stop.
• The distance and speed measurements will continue to display until the OK button is
pushed.
• Pushing the OK button will clear the current run and prepare the cluster to record a new
run.
Current G-Force
• When selected, this screen displays the current G-Force (lateral and longitudinal) along
with a friction circle that displays the directions of the forces.
Peak G-Force
When selected, this screen displays all four G-Force values (two lateral and two longitudinal).
• When a force greater than zero is measured, the display will update the value as it
climbs. As the G-Force falls, the peak forces will continue to display.
• Pushing the OK button will clear the peak force values.
Lap Timer
When selected the Lap Timer page will show the timer always at 0:00.00 with the previous
Best and Last time data (unless the driver has cleared it via hold to Reset).
• Pushing the OK button will start “current” timer from 0:00.0.
• When the OK button is pushed, the times are updated accordingly.
• As soon as the driver exits the Lap Timer pages, the “current” timer will stop and the
time will be reset to 0:00.00.
• If the driver stays on the Lap Timer pages, the “current” timer will reset to 0:00.0 when
ignition is placed in the OFF position, or ignition placed in the ON position (or will roll
over at 59:59.99 if ever possible).
• Each time the driver pushes the OK button for a Lap that current time populates the
Last time and also populates the 1st (top) space on the Timer History page the current
time resets to 0:00.0 at every push of the OK button.
• The timer will stop when the driver navigates away from this page.
173
SRT
Lap History
When selected, this screen displays the Lap History, and will color highlight the time that
is the best time from the Timer Page.
• Each time the driver presses the OK button (while on the Lap Timer page) the current
Lap Time populates the 1st spot and the rest of the data shifts down.
• Color will indicate the time that is the best time from the Timer Page.
• Holding the OK button only resets the page you are on.
• Lap History page is a static display of lap times only.
Top Speed
When selected, this screen displays the Top Speed during a drive cycle:
• Populates a top speed from first drive cycle and every time that speed is exceeded that
number is stored here unless/until the driver resets the screen.
• Latching over ignition cycles.
• Units will change with the global change in units.
WARNING!
Measurement of vehicle statistics with the Performance Features is intended for
off-highway or off-road use only and should not be done on any public roadways. It is
recommended that these features be used in a controlled environment and within the
limits of the law. The capabilities of the vehicle as measured by the performance pages
must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which can jeopardize the
user’s safety or the safety of others. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent
accidents.
UCONNECT PERFORMANCE PAGES
To access the Performance Pages, press the “Apps” button on the touchscreen then press
the “Performance Pages” button on the touchscreen.
The Performance Pages includes the following menus:
•
•
•
Home
Timers
Gauges 1
•
•
•
Gauges 2
G – Force
Engine
Home
When Home is selected, the following options will be available:
• A series of six images which can be selected by the user.
• A left and right arrow to allow the user to scroll through vehicle images.
• A short-cut to the Drive Modes feature.
174
SRT
Timers
When the Timers Page is selected you will be able to select from following “Tickets”:
Current
• Pressing the “Current” button displays a “real time” summary of performance timers.
Last
• Pressing the “Last” button displays the last recorded run of performance timers.
Best
• Pressing the “Best” button displays the best recorded run of performance timers,
except for braking data.
Save
• Pressing the “Save” button will let you save the last run. Any saved run over 10, will
overwrite the last saved run for Uconnect System storage.
Gauges 1
When selected, this screen displays the following values:
• Coolant Temperature
• Oil Pressure
• Oil Temperature
• Battery Voltage
• Trans Oil Temp
Gauges 2
When selected, this screen displays the following values for the 6.2L:
• Boost Pressure
• Air Fuel Ratio
• Inter-Cooler (I/C) Coolant Temperature
• Intake Air Temperature
When selected, this screen displays the following values for the 6.4L:
• Battery Voltage
• Intake Air Temperature
• Transmission Temperature
175
SRT
G-Force
When selected, this screen displays the following values:
• Lateral G-Force Left and Right
• Longitudinal G-Force Fore and Aft
• Peak G-Forces Fore Aft, Left and Right
• Vehicle Speed
• Steering Wheel Angle
Engine
When selected, this screen displays the following values:
• Vehicle Speed
• Instantaneous Horsepower/Kilowatts
• Instantaneous Torque
• Oil Pressure (6.4L Only)
• Gear (Automatic Transmission Only)
• Boost Pressure (6.2L Only)
176
W H AT T O D O I N E M E R G E N C I E S
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
Dial toll-free
1-800-521-2779
for U.S. Residents or
1-800-363-4869
for Canadian Residents.
• Provide your name, vehicle identification number, license plate number, and your
location, including the telephone number from which you are calling.
• Briefly describe the nature of the problem and answer a few simple questions.
• You will be given the name of the service provider and an estimated time of arrival. If
you feel you are in an “unsafe situation”, please let us know. With your consent, we will
contact local police or safety authorities.
WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS
The warning/indicator lights switch on in the instrument panel together with a dedicated
message and/or acoustic signal when applicable. These indications are indicative and
precautionary and as such must not be considered as exhaustive and/or alternative to the
information contained in the Owner’s Manual, which you are advised to read carefully in
all cases. Always refer to the information in this chapter in the event of a failure indication.
All active telltales will display first, if applicable. The system check menu may appear
different based upon equipment options and current vehicle status.
This guide illustrates and describes the operation of warning and indicator telltales that
are either standard or optional based on the vehicle build. FCA reserves the right to make
changes in design and specifications and/or make additions to or improvements to its
products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products
previously manufactured.
Instrument Cluster Warning Lights
— Low Fuel Warning Light
This warning light indicates when the fuel level reaches approximately 1.5 gal (5.8 L).
This light will turn on and a single chime will sound.
— Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light
The “ESC Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switch
is turned to the ON/RUN position. It should go out with the engine running. If the “ESC
Indicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been
detected in the ESC system.
177
W H AT T O D O I N E M E R G E N C I E S
If this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven
several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 MPH (48 km/h), we recommend you
drive to the nearest service center and have the vehicle serviced immediately.
— Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light
The warning light switches on and a message is displayed to indicate that the tire pressure
is lower than the recommended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these
cases, optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned above, the display will show the
indications corresponding to each tire in sequence.
CAUTION!
Do not continue driving with one or more flat tires as handling may be compromised.
Stop the vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and steering. If a tire puncture occurs, repair
immediately using the dedicated tire repair kit and contact your authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size
than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure
monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more
of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to
the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the
driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with
the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash
for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence
will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When
the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal
low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons,
including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that
prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale
after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement
or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
178
W H AT T O D O I N E M E R G E N C I E S
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS
pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle.
Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement
equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can
cause sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket
tire sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle to your authorized dealer to
have your sensor function checked.
— Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condition.
If the light turns on or flashes continuously while driving, safely pull over and stop the
vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and
idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading does not return to normal, turn the engine off
immediately.
We recommend that you do not operate the vehicle or engine damage will occur. Have the
vehicle serviced immediately.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or others could be badly burned by
steam or boiling content.
— Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied,
that the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system
reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged, and the fluid level is
at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake hydraulic
system malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this case,
the light will remain on until the condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to
the brake booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake, and a brake pedal
pulsation may be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to a
portion of the hydraulic system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated
by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master
cylinder has dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
179
W H AT T O D O I N E M E R G E N C I E S
NOTE:
The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers, which change fluid
level conditions. The vehicle should have service performed, and the brake fluid level
checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is dangerous. Part of the brake system may
have failed. It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a collision. Have the
vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) are also equipped with
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake
Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system
is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from
the OFF position to the ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for approximately
two seconds. The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake
fault is detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light inspected by an authorized
dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the
ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
This light shows only that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of
brake application.
— Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor fuel quality, etc., may
illuminate the MIL after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on
through several typical driving cycles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive normally
and not require towing.
If the MIL flashes when the engine is running, serious conditions may exist that could lead
to immediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage. We recommend you do
not operate the vehicle. Have the vehicle serviced immediately.
180
W H AT T O D O I N E M E R G E N C I E S
— Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light
The ESC Off mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use only and should not be used
on any public roadways. In this mode, all TCS and ESC stability features are turned OFF.
To enter the “Full Off” mode, push and hold the “ESC” switch for five seconds while the
vehicle is stopped with the engine running. After five seconds, a chime will sound, the
“ESC OFF” Indicator Light” will illuminate, and the "ESC OFF" message will display in the
vehicle cluster (left of the odometer). To turn ESC ON again, momentarily push the “ESC”
switch.
— Battery Charge Warning Light
This light illuminates when the battery is not charging properly. If the battery charge
warning light remains on, it means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the
charging system.
We recommend you do not continue driving if the battery charge warning light is on. Have
the vehicle serviced immediately.
— Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound when this light
turns on.
We recommend you do not operate the vehicle or engine damage will occur. Have the
vehicle serviced immediately.
— Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS).
If the light is not on during startup, stays on, or turns on while driving we recommend you
contact the nearest authorized dealer and have the vehicle serviced immediately.
— Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Indicator Light
This light informs you of a problem with the system.
If a problem is detected, the light will come on while the engine is running. Cycle the
ignition when the vehicle has completely stopped and the gear selector is placed in the
PARK position; the light should turn off.
If the light remains lit with the engine running, your vehicle will usually be drivable.
However, see an authorized dealer immediately. If the light is flashing when the engine is
running, immediate service is required, and you may experience reduced performance, an
elevated/rough idle or engine stall, and your vehicle may require towing.
181
W H AT T O D O I N E M E R G E N C I E S
— Seat Belt Reminder Light
When the ignition switch is first turned to the ON/RUN position, this light will turn on for
four to eight seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb check, if the driver's seat belt is
unbuckled, a chime will sound. After the bulb check or when driving, if the driver or front
passenger seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Indicator Light will flash or remain
on continuously. Refer to “Seat Belt Systems” in “Getting Started” for further information.
— Air Bag Warning Light
If the light is not on during startup, stays on, or turns on while driving have the vehicle
serviced by an authorized dealer immediately.
— Transmission Temperature Warning Light
This light indicates that there is excessive transmission fluid temperature that might
occur with severe usage such as trailer towing. If this light turns on, stop the vehicle and
run the engine at idle, with the transmission in NEUTRAL, until the light turns off. Once
the light turns off, you may continue to drive normally.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the Transmission Temperature Warning
Light is illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in contact with hot
engine or exhaust components and cause a fire.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature Warning Light illuminated will
eventually cause severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
182
W H AT T O D O I N E M E R G E N C I E S
Oil Life Reset
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system. The “Oil Change
Due” message will flash in the instrument cluster display for approximately 5 seconds
after a single chime has sounded, to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval. The
engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the engine oil
change interval may fluctuate, dependent upon your personal driving style.
Vehicles Equipped With Passive Entry
• Without pressing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE START/STOP button and cycle the
ignition to the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
• Push and release the down arrow button to scroll downward through the main menu to
“Vehicle Info.”
• Push and release the right arrow button to access the ”Oil Life” screen.
• Push and hold the OK button until the screen shows 100% oil life.
• Push and release the up arrow button to exit the instrument cluster display.
Vehicles Not Equipped With Passive Entry
• Without pressing the brake pedal, cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position (do not
start the engine).
• Push and release the down arrow button to scroll downward through the main menu to
“Vehicle Info.”
• Push and release the right arrow button to access the “Oil Life” screen.
• Push and hold the OK button until the screen shows 100% oil life.
• Push and release the up arrow button to exit the instrument cluster display.
NOTE:
If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle, the oil change indicator
system did not reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
183
W H AT T O D O I N E M E R G E N C I E S
Instrument Cluster Indicator Lights
— Turn Signal Indicator
The arrows will flash with the exterior turn signals when the turn signal lever is operated.
A tone will chime, and an instrument cluster display message will appear if either turn
signal is left on for more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
NOTE:
If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate, check for a defective outside light bulb.
— Park/Headlight ON Indicator
This indicator will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on.
— High Beam Indicator
Indicates that headlights are on high beam.
— Front Fog Light Indicator
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on.
— Vehicle Security Light
This light will flash rapidly for approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle security alarm
is arming. The light will flash at a slower speed continuously after the alarm is set. The
security light will also come on for about three seconds when the ignition is first turned on.
— Cruise Control ON Indicator
This indicator will illuminate when the Cruise Control has been activated to the “Ready”
position.
— Cruise Control SET Indicator
This indicator will illuminate when the cruising speed has been set.
— Sport Mode
This light will illuminate when SPORT MODE is selected. Sport Mode will provide improved
throttle response and modified shifting for an enhanced driving experience as well as the
greatest amount of steering feel.
— Fuel Cap/Loose Gas Cap Message
If a “gas cap” message appears, tighten the gas cap until a “clicking” sound is heard.
Push the odometer reset button to turn the message off.
If the message continues to appear for more than three days after tightening the gas cap,
see your authorized service center.
184
W H AT T O D O I N E M E R G E N C I E S
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking
the appropriate action.
• On the highways — slow down.
• In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission in NEUTRAL, but do not
increase the engine idle speed.
NOTE:
There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition:
• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C system adds heat to the engine
cooling system and turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum heat, the mode control to floor
and the blower control to high. This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to the
radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your
radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not open the hood
until the radiator has had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap
when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge
reads “H,” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner
turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on
the “H,” turn the engine off immediately and call for service.
185
W H AT T O D O I N E M E R G E N C I E S
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull
far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or
changing the wheel.
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The vehicle could slip off the jack and
fall on you. You could be crushed. Never put any part of your body under a vehicle
that is on a jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack.
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing tires only. The jack should not
be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should be jacked on a firm
level surface only. Avoid ice or slippery areas.
Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage
The jack and spare tire are both stowed under an access cover in the trunk. Follow these
steps to access the jack and spare tire.
NOTE:
The spare tire must be removed in order to access the jack.
1. Open the trunk.
2. Lift the access cover using the pull strap.
Spare Tire/Tools Location
1 — Jack Beneath Spare Tire
2 — Spare Tire
3 — Pull Strap
186
W H AT T O D O I N E M E R G E N C I E S
3. Remove the fastener securing the spare tire.
4. Remove the spare tire.
Spare Tire Fastener
5. Remove the fastener securing the jack.
6. Remove the jack and lug wrench assembly from under the spare tire. Turn the
jack screw to the left to loosen the lug
wrench, and remove the wrench from
the jack assembly.
Jack Fastener
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the
occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places
provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced immediately.
187
W H AT T O D O I N E M E R G E N C I E S
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible.
Avoid icy or slippery areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic, pull
far enough off the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack or changing the
wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
3. Set the parking brake.
4. Place the gear selector into PARK (automatic transmission) or FIRST GEAR (manual
transmission).
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite of the jacking position.
For example, if changing the right front tire, block the left rear wheel.
NOTE:
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being jacked.
Wheel Blocked
188
W H AT T O D O I N E M E R G E N C I E S
Jacking And Changing A Tire
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage
to your vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible
before raising the vehicle.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be raised.
• Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic transmission in PARK; a manual
transmission in REVERSE or FIRST GEAR.
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a jack.
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If you need to get under a raised
vehicle, take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for lifting this vehicle during a tire
change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely careful of motor traffic.
Warning Label
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on locations other than those indicated
in the Jacking Instructions for this vehicle.
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and lug wrench.
2. If equipped with aluminum wheels where the center cap covers the lug nuts, use the
lug wrench to pry the center cap off carefully before raising the vehicle.
3. Before raising the vehicle, use the lug wrench to loosen, but not remove, the lug nuts
on the wheel with the flat tire. Turn the lug nuts counterclockwise one turn while the
wheel is still on the ground.
4. Place the jack underneath the lift area that is closest to the flat tire. Turn the jack screw
clockwise to firmly engage the jack saddle with the lift area of the sill flange.
189
W H AT T O D O I N E M E R G E N C I E S
NOTE:
If the vehicle is too low for jack placement, slide the jack on its side and rotate it up into
position.
5. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove
the flat tire and install the spare tire.
Front Jacking Location
Rear Jacking Location
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable. It could slip
off the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire.
6. Remove the lug nuts and tire.
7. Mount the spare tire.
190
W H AT T O D O I N E M E R G E N C I E S
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem facing outward. The vehicle could
be damaged if the spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
NOTE:
• For vehicles so equipped, do not attempt to install a center cap or wheel
cover on the compact spare.
• Refer to “Compact Spare Tire” and to
“Limited-Use Spare” under “Tires—
General Information” in “Starting And
Operating” in the Owner’s Manual on
www.dodge.com/en/owners/manuals
for additional warnings, cautions, and
information about the spare tire, its
use, and operation.
Installing Compact Spare
8. Install the lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the lug nut toward the wheel. Lightly
tighten the lug nuts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten the lug nuts fully until
the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in personal
injury.
9. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack handle counterclockwise.
10. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the wrench while at the end of the
handle for increased leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each nut has
been tightened twice. The correct tightness of each lug nut is 130 ft-lb. (176 N·m).
If in doubt about the correct tightness, have them checked with a torque wrench by
your authorized dealer or at a service station.
NOTE:
For the SRT model the correct wheel nut tightness is 111 ft lbs (150 N·m).
191
W H AT T O D O I N E M E R G E N C I E S
11. Stow the jack, tools and flat tire. Make sure the base of the jack faces the front of the
vehicle before tightening down the fastener.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the
occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places
provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced immediately.
Road Tire Installation
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut toward the wheel.
Lightly tighten the lug nuts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten the lug nuts fully until
the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in personal
injury.
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack handle counterclockwise.
4. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the wrench while at the end of the handle
for increased leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each nut has been
tightened twice. The correct tightness of each lug nut is 130 ft-lbs (176 N·m). If in
doubt about the correct tightness, have them checked with a torque wrench by your
authorized dealer or service station.
NOTE:
For the SRT model the correct wheel nut tightness is 111 ft lbs (150 N·m).
5. After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut torque with a torque wrench to ensure that
all lug nuts are properly seated against the wheel.
192
W H AT T O D O I N E M E R G E N C I E S
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED
Description
Small punctures up to 1/4 inch (6 mm) in the tire tread can be sealed with Tire Service Kit.
Foreign objects (e.g., screws or nails) should not be removed from the tire. Tire Service Kit
can be used in outside temperatures down to approximately -4°F (-20°C).
This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you to drive your vehicle up to
100 miles (160 km) with a maximum speed of 55 mph (90 km/h).
Tire Service Kit Storage
The Tire Service Kit is located in the trunk.
Tire Service Kit Components And Operation
Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses
Your Tire Service Kit is equipped with the
following symbols to indicate the air or sealant mode.
•
Selecting Air Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn
to this position for air pump operation only.
Use the Black Air Pump Hose (7) when
selecting this mode.
•
Selecting Sealant Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn
to this position to inject the Tire Service Kit
Sealant and to inflate the tire. Use the
Sealant Hose (clear hose) (6) when selecting this mode.
•
Using The Power Button
Push and release the Power Button (4) once
to turn on the Tire Service Kit. Push and
release the Power Button (4) again to turn
Off the Tire Service Kit.
•
Using The Deflation Button
Push the Deflation Button (2) to reduce the
air pressure in the tire if it becomes over inflated.
Tire Service Kit Components
1 — Sealant Bottle
2 — Deflation Button
3 — Pressure Gauge
4 — Power Button
5 — Mode Select Knob
6 — Sealant Hose (Clear)
7 — Air Pump Hose (Black)
8 — Power Plug (located on the bottom
side of the Tire Service Kit)
193
W H AT T O D O I N E M E R G E N C I E S
Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions
• Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) prior to the
expiration date (printed at the lower right hand corner on the bottle label) to assure
optimum operation of the system. Refer to “Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit”
section (F) “Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement”.
• The Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) are a one tire application use and need to
be replaced after each use. Always replace these components immediately at your
original equipment vehicle dealer.
• When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a liquid form, clean water, and a damp cloth will
remove the material from the vehicle or tire and wheel components. Once the sealant
dries, it can easily be peeled off and properly discarded.
• For optimum performance, make sure the valve stem on the wheel is free of debris
before connecting the Tire Service Kit.
• You can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to inflate bicycle tires. The kit also comes with
two needles, located in the Accessory Storage Compartment (on the bottom of the air
pump) for inflating sport balls, rafts, or similar inflatable items. However, use only the
Air Pump Hose (7) and make sure the Mode Select Knob (5) is in the Air Mode when
inflating such items to avoid injecting sealant into them. The Tire Service Kit Sealant
is only intended to seal punctures less than 1/4 inch (6 mm) diameter in the tread of
your tire.
• Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the hoses.
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far
enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when using the Tire Service Kit.
• Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle under the following circumstances:
• If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately 1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger.
• If the tire has any sidewall damage.
• If the tire has any damage from driving with extremely low tire pressure.
• If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat tire.
• If the wheel has any damage.
• If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or the wheel.
• Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames or heat sources.
• A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the
occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the Tire Service Kit in the place provided.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you,
your passengers, and others around you.
• Take care not to allow the contents of Tire Service Kit to come in contact with hair,
eyes, or clothing. Tire Service Kit sealant is harmful if inhaled, swallowed, or
absorbed through the skin. It causes skin, eye, and respiratory irritation. Flush
immediately with plenty of water if there is any contact with eyes or skin. Change
clothing as soon as possible, if there is any contact with clothing.
194
W H AT T O D O I N E M E R G E N C I E S
WARNING!
• Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex. In case of an allergic reaction or rash,
consult a physician immediately. Keep Tire Service Kit out of reach of children. If
swallowed, rinse mouth immediately with plenty of water and drink plenty of water.
Do not induce vomiting! Consult a physician immediately.
Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit
(A) Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle’s Hazard Warning flashers.
2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the deflated tire) is in a position that is
near to the ground. This will allow the Tire Service Kit Hoses (6) and (7) to reach the
valve stem and keep the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground. This will provide the best
positioning of the kit when injecting the sealant into the deflated tire and running the
air pump. Move the vehicle as necessary to place the valve stem in this position before
proceeding.
3. Place the transmission in PARK (auto transmission) or in Gear (manual transmission)
and place the ignition in the OFF position.
4. Apply the parking brake.
(B) Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the Sealant Mode position.
2. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) and then remove the cap from the fitting at the end of the
hose.
3. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground next to the deflated tire.
4. Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw the fitting at the end of the
Sealant Hose (6) onto the valve stem.
5. Uncoil the Power Plug (8) and insert the plug into the vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
NOTE:
Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or nails) from the tire.
(C) Injecting Tire Service Kit Sealant Into The Deflated Tire:
• Always start the engine before turning on the Tire Service Kit.
NOTE:
Manual transmission vehicles must have the parking brake engaged and the gear selector in NEUTRAL.
• After pushing the Power Button (4), the sealant (white fluid) will flow from the Sealant
Bottle (1) through the Sealant Hose (6) and into the tire.
195
W H AT T O D O I N E M E R G E N C I E S
NOTE:
Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the tire.
If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within 0 – 10 seconds through the Sealant
Hose (6):
1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn off the Tire Service Kit. Disconnect the Sealant Hose
(6) from the valve stem. Make sure the valve stem is free of debris. Reconnect the
Sealant Hose (6) to the valve stem. Check that the Mode Select Knob (5) is in the
Sealant Mode position and not Air Mode. Push the Power Button (4) to turn on the Tire
Service Kit.
2. Connect the Power Plug (8) to a different 12 Volt power outlet in your vehicle or
another vehicle, if available. Make sure the engine is running before turning on the Tire
Service Kit.
3. The Sealant Bottle (1) may be empty due to previous use. Call for assistance.
NOTE:
If the Mode Select Knob (5) is on Air Mode and the pump is operating, air will dispense
from the Air Pump Hose (7) only, not the Sealant Hose (6).
If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the Sealant Hose (6):
1. Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no longer flowing through hose (typically
takes 30 - 70 seconds). As the sealant flows through the Sealant Hose (6), the
Pressure Gauge (3) can read as high as 70 psi (4.8 Bar). The Pressure Gauge (3) will
decrease quickly from approximately 70 psi (4.8 Bar) to the actual tire pressure when
the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty.
2. The pump will start to inject air into the tire immediately after the Sealant Bottle (1)
is empty. Continue to operate the pump and inflate the tire to the pressure indicated
on the tire pressure label on the driver-side latch pillar (recommended pressure).
Check the tire pressure by looking at the Pressure Gauge (3).
If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes:
• The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive the vehicle further. Call for
assistance.
NOTE:
If the tire becomes overinflated, push the Deflation Button to reduce the tire pressure to
the recommended inflation pressure before continuing.
If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure
within 15 minutes:
1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn off the Tire Service Kit.
2. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top of the Sealant Bottle (1) and place the
sticker on the instrument panel.
196
W H AT T O D O I N E M E R G E N C I E S
3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the valve stem, reinstall the cap on
the fitting at the end of the hose, and place the Tire Service Kit in the vehicle storage
location. Quickly proceed to (D) “Drive Vehicle.”
CAUTION!
• The metal end fitting from Power Plug (8) may get hot after use, so it should be
handled carefully.
• Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (6) can result
in sealant contacting your skin, clothing, and the vehicle’s interior. It can also result
in sealant contacting internal Tire Service Kit components which may cause permanent damage to the kit.
(D) Drive Vehicle:
Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating the tire, drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km)
or 10 minutes to ensure distribution of the Tire Service Kit Sealant within the tire. Do not
exceed 55 mph (90 km/h).
WARNING!
Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire repair. Have the tire inspected and repaired
or replaced after using Tire Service Kit. Do not exceed 55 mph (90 km/h) until the tire
is repaired or replaced. Failure to follow this warning can result in injuries that are
serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
(E) After Driving:
Pull over to a safe location. Refer to “Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit” before
continuing.
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the Air Mode position.
2. Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug into the vehicle's 12 Volt power outlet.
3. Uncoil the Air Pump Hose (7) (black in color) and screw the fitting at the end of hose
(7) onto the valve stem.
4. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure Gauge (3).
If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar):
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive the vehicle further. Call for
assistance.
197
W H AT T O D O I N E M E R G E N C I E S
If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher:
1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn on Tire Service Kit and inflate the tire to the pressure
indicated on the tire and loading information label on the driver-side door opening.
NOTE:
If the tire becomes over-inflated, push the Deflation Button to reduce the tire pressure to
the recommended inflation pressure before continuing.
2. Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the valve stem, reinstall the cap on the valve stem
and unplug from 12 Volt outlet.
3. Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper storage area in the vehicle.
4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the earliest opportunity at an
authorized dealer or tire service center.
5. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the instrument panel after the tire has been
repaired.
6. Replace the Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) assembly at your authorized
dealer as soon as possible. Refer to (F) “Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement”.
NOTE:
When having the tire serviced, advise the authorized dealer or service center that the tire
has been sealed using the Tire Service Kit.
(F) Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement:
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) (clear in color).
2. Locate the round Sealant Bottle release button in the recessed area under the sealant
bottle.
3. Push the Sealant Bottle release button. The Sealant Bottle (1) will pop up. Remove the
bottle and dispose of it accordingly.
4. Clean any remaining sealant from the Tire Service Kit housing.
5. Position the new Sealant Bottle (1) in the housing so that the Sealant Hose (6) aligns
with the hose slot in the front of the housing. Push the bottle into the housing. An
audible click will be heard indicating the bottle is locked into place.
6. Verify that the cap is installed on the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (6) and
return the hose to its storage area (located on the bottom of the air pump).
7. Return the Tire Service Kit to its storage location in the vehicle.
198
W H AT T O D O I N E M E R G E N C I E S
BATTERY LOCATION
The battery is stored under an access cover in the trunk. Remote battery posts are located
on the right side of the engine compartment for jump starting.
JUMP STARTING PROCEDURES
If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can be jump started using a set of jumper cables
and a battery in another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster pack. Jump starting
can be dangerous if done improperly, so please follow the procedures in this section
carefully.
NOTE:
When using a portable battery booster pack, follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and precautions.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen. It could rupture or explode and
cause personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other booster source with a system
voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor, alternator or
electrical system may occur.
199
W H AT T O D O I N E M E R G E N C I E S
Preparations For Jump Start
The battery is stored under an access cover in the trunk. Remote battery posts are located
on the right side of the engine compartment for jump starting.
Jump Starting Locations
1 — Positive Terminal
2 — Negative Terminal
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can start
anytime the ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by moving fan blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch bands and bracelets that could make
an inadvertent electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen
gas which is flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or sparks away from the
battery.
1. Set the parking brake, shift into PARK (automatic transmission) or FIRST GEAR
(manual transmission) and cycle the ignition to OFF.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories.
3. If using another vehicle to jump start the battery, park the vehicle within the jumper
cables reach, set the parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection
and personal injury could result.
200
W H AT T O D O I N E M E R G E N C I E S
Jump Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump-starting procedure could result in personal injury or property
damage due to battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in damage to the charging system of the
booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the remote positive (+) post of the
vehicle with the discharged battery.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the
booster battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to the negative (-) post of the booster
battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper cable to the remote negative (-)
post of the vehicle with the discharged battery.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-) post of the discharged battery. The
resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury. Only use the specific ground point, do not use any other exposed metal
parts.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery, let the engine idle a few
minutes, and then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in the reverse sequence:
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable from the remote negative (-) post
of the vehicle with the discharged battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper cable from the negative (-) post
of the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable from the positive (+) post of the
booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper cable from the remote positive
(+) post of the vehicle with the discharged battery.
201
W H AT T O D O I N E M E R G E N C I E S
If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle you should have the battery and
charging system inspected at your authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw power from the vehicle’s
battery, even when not in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long
enough without engine operation, the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to
degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it can often be moved using a rocking
motion. Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the front wheels. For
vehicles with automatic transmission, push and hold the lock button on the gear selector.
Then shift back and forth between DRIVE and REVERSE (with automatic transmission) or
FIRST GEAR and REVERSE (with manual transmission), while gently pressing the
accelerator. Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will maintain the
rocking motion, without spinning the wheels or racing the engine.
NOTE:
For vehicles with automatic transmission: Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only
be achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less. Whenever the transmission
remains in NEUTRAL for more than two seconds, you must press the brake pedal to
engage DRIVE or REVERSE.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to transmission overheating and
failure. Allow the engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at least one
minute after every five rocking-motion cycles. This will minimize overheating and
reduce the risk of clutch or transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck
vehicle.
NOTE:
Push the "ESC Off" switch to place the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system in "Partial
Off" mode before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control” in “Starting And
Operating” in the Owner’s Manual on www.dodge.com/en/owners/manuals for further
information. Once the vehicle has been freed, push the "ESC Off" switch again to restore
"ESC On" mode.
202
W H AT T O D O I N E M E R G E N C I E S
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may
cause damage, or even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could explode and injure
someone. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer
than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck and do not let
anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
CAUTION!
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between DRIVE / FIRST GEAR and
REVERSE, do not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain
damage may result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast may lead to transmission
overheating and failure. It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission shifting occurring).
MANUAL PARK RELEASE — 8 SPEED TRANSMISSION
WARNING!
Always secure your vehicle by fully applying the parking brake, before activating the
Manual Park Release. In addition, you should be seated in the driver’s seat with your
foot firmly on the brake pedal when activating the Manual Park Release. Activating the
Manual Park Release will allow your vehicle to roll away if it is not secured by the
parking brake or by proper connection to a tow vehicle. Activating the Manual Park
Release on an unsecured vehicle could lead to serious injury or death for those in or
around the vehicle.
In order to move the vehicle in cases where the transmission will not shift out of PARK
(such as a dead battery), a Manual Park Release is available.
203
W H AT T O D O I N E M E R G E N C I E S
Follow these steps to use the Manual Park Release:
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
2. Remove the console storage bin to access the Manual Park Release lever.
3. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool,
fish the tether strap up through the
opening in the console base.
4. Insert the screwdriver into the slot in the
center of the lever, and disengage the
lever locking tab by pushing it to the
right.
Console Storage Bin
5. While holding the locking tab in the disengaged position, pull the tether strap to rotate
the lever up and rearward until it locks in place in the vertical position. The vehicle is
now out of PARK and can be moved. Release the parking brake only when the vehicle
is securely connected to a tow vehicle.
Tether Strap
204
W H AT T O D O I N E M E R G E N C I E S
To Reset The Manual Park Release:
1. Push the latch (at the base of the lever, on the rear side) rearward (away from the lever)
to unlatch the lever.
2. Rotate the Manual Park Release lever forward and down, to its original position, until
the locking tab snaps into place to secure the lever.
3. Pull up gently on the tether strap to confirm that the lever is locked in its stowed
position.
4. Tuck the tether strap into the base of the console. Reinstall the console storage bin.
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial
towing service.
Towing
Condition
Flat Tow
Wheels OFF The
Ground
NONE
Front
RWD MODELS
If transmission is
operable:
• Transmission in
NEUTRAL
• 30 mph (48 km/h)
max speed
• 30 miles (48 km)
max distance
NOT RECOMMENDED (but,
if used, same limitations
as above)
Wheel Lift Or
Dolly Tow
Flatbed
Rear
NOT RECOMMENDED
ALL
BEST METHOD
AWD MODELS
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
NOT RECOMMENDED,
but, if used:
• Ignition in
ON/RUN mode
• Transmission in
NEUTRAL
(NOT in PARK)
BEST METHOD
Refer to your Owner's Manual on www.dodge.com/en/owners/manuals for further details.
205
W H AT T O D O I N E M E R G E N C I E S
Rear-Wheel Drive (RWD) Models
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with all four wheels OFF the ground
using a flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmission is operable, the vehicle may be
flat towed (with all four wheels on the ground) under the following conditions:
• The transmission must be in NEUTRAL. Refer to "Manual Park Release" in this section
for instructions on shifting the automatic transmission to NEUTRAL when the engine
is off.
• The towing distance must not exceed 30 miles (48 km).
• The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must be towed faster than 30 mph
(48 km/h) or farther than 30 miles (48 km) , then the only acceptable method of towing
is with a flatbed truck.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe engine
and/or transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
All Wheel Drive (AWD) Models
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with all four wheels OFF the ground
using a flatbed.
If the transmission and drivetrain are operable, AWD models can also be towed with the
ignition in the ON/RUN mode, the transmission in NEUTRAL (not in PARK!), and the rear
wheels OFF the ground with no limitation on speed or distance. Since the ignition MUST
be in the ON/RUN mode to tow in this manner, AWD vehicles must be towed with ALL
FOUR wheels OFF the ground (e.g. on a flatbed truck) if the key fob is unavailable.
CAUTION!
• Towing this vehicle using any other method can cause severe transmission and/or
transfer case damage.
• Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
206
W H AT T O D O I N E M E R G E N C I E S
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM (EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced Accident Response System.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Getting Started” for further information
on the Enhanced Accident Response System (EARS) function.
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR
is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment
or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems
performed.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Getting Started” for further information
on the Event Data Recorder (EDR).
207
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
Two latches must be released to open the hood.
1. Pull the hood release lever located under the left side of the instrument panel.
Hood Release Lever
2. Move to the outside of the vehicle, the safety catch is located under the center front
edge of the hood.
Hood Safety Catch Location
208
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Push the safety catch to the left.
Hood Safety Catch
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your vehicle. If the hood is not fully
latched, it could open when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision. Failure to
follow this warning could result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to close it. Lower hood to
approximately 12 inches (30 cm) and drop the hood to close. Make sure hood is fully
closed for both latches. Never drive vehicle unless hood is fully closed, with both
latches engaged.
209
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L
1. Remote Jump Start Positive Terminal
2. Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
3. Remote Jump Start Negative Terminal
4. Engine Oil Dipstick
5. Washer Fluid Reservoir
210
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
6. Engine Oil Fill
7. Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover
8. Engine Coolant Reservoir Pressure Cap
9. Air Cleaner Filter
211
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 5.7L
1. Remote Jump Start Positive Terminal
2. Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
3. Remote Jump Start Negative Terminal
4. Engine Oil Dipstick
5. Washer Fluid Reservoir
212
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
6. Engine Oil Fill
7. Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover
8. Engine Coolant Reservoir Pressure Cap
9. Air Cleaner Filter
213
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 6.2L SUPERCHARGED
1. Remote Jump Start Positive Terminal
2. Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
3. Intercooler Coolant Reservoir Pressure Cap
4. Remote Jump Start Negative Terminal
5. Engine Oil Dipstick
6. Washer Fluid Reservoir
214
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
7. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
8. Engine Oil Fill
9. Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover
10. Engine Coolant Reservoir Pressure Cap
11. Air Filter Cleaner
215
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 6.4L
1. Remote Jump Start Positive Terminal
2. Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
3. Remote Jump Start Negative Terminal
4. Engine Oil Dipstick
5. Washer Fluid Reservoir
216
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
6. Engine Oil Fill
7. Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover
8. Engine Coolant Reservoir Pressure Cap
9. Air Cleaner Filter
217
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUID CAPACITIES — DODGE
Fluid Capacities — 3.6L
U.S.
Fuel (Approximate)
87 Octane, 0-15% Ethanol
18.5 Gallons
Engine Oil With Filter
SAE 5W-20, API Certified
6 Quarts
Cooling System*
Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/
11.1 Quarts
150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
Metric
70 Liters
5.6 Liters
10.5 Liters
Fluid Capacities — 5.7L Automatic Transmission
U.S.
Fuel (Approximate)
Automatic Transmission: 87 Octane or 89 Octane,
18.5 Gallons
0-15% Ethanol
Engine Oil With Filter
SAE 5W-20, API Certified
7 Quarts
Cooling System*
Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/
14.7 Quarts
150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
Metric
70 Liters
6.6 Liters
13.9 Liters
Fluid Capacities — 5.7L Manual Transmission
U.S.
Fuel (Approximate)
Manual Transmission: 91 Octane or higher, 0-15%
18.5 Gallons
Ethanol
Engine Oil With Filter
SAE 5W-20, API Certified
7 Quarts
Cooling System*
Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/
14.7 Quarts
150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
218
Metric
70 Liters
6.6 Liters
13.9 Liters
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Fluid Capacities — 6.4L
U.S.
Fuel (Approximate)
91 Octane or higher, 0-15% Ethanol
18.5 Gallons
Engine Oil With Filter
SAE 0W-40, Synthetic API Certified
7 Quarts
Cooling System*
Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) 10 Year/150,000 Mile For15 Quarts
mula or equivalent
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
Metric
70 Liters
6.6 Liters
14.4 Liters
FLUID CAPACITIES — SRT
Fluid Capacities — SRT 6.2L
U.S.
Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
91 Octane or higher, 0-15% Ethanol
18.5 Gallons
70 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
SAE 0W-40, Synthetic API Certified
7 Quarts
6.6 Liters
Cooling System *
Engine: Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant (OAT coolant
conforming to MS.90032) 10 Year/150,000 Mile For15 Quarts
14.4 Liters
mula or equivalent
Intercooler: Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant (OAT
coolant conforming to MS.90032) 10 Year/
4.5 Quarts
4.2 Liters
150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
Fluid Capacities — SRT 6.4L
U.S.
Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
91 Octane or higher, 0-15% Ethanol
18.5 Gallons
70 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
SAE 0W-40, Synthetic API Certified
7 Quarts
6.6 Liters
Cooling System *
Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) 10 Year/150,000 Mile For15 Quarts
14.4 Liters
mula or equivalent
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
219
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS — DODGE
Engine — 3.6L
Component
Engine Coolant
Engine Oil
Engine Oil Filter
Spark Plugs
Fuel Selection
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/
Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT
(Organic Additive Technology).
We recommend you use API Certified SAE
5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS6395 such as Mopar, Pennzoil, and Shell
Helix. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for
correct SAE grade.
We recommend you use Mopar Engine Oil
Filters.
We recommend you use Mopar Spark Plugs.
87 Octane, 0-15% Ethanol.
Chassis — 3.6L
Component
8-Speed Automatic Transmission
Brake Master Cylinder
Front Axle
Rear Axle
Transfer Case
220
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Use only Mopar ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission
Fluid, or equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may
affect the function or performance of your transmission.
We recommend you use Mopar DOT 3, SAE J1703. If DOT
3 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable.
We recommend you use Mopar Synthetic Gear Lubricant
SAE 75W90 (API GL-5).
We recommend you use Mopar OD Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W85 (API GL-5).
We recommend you use Mopar Transfer Case Lubricant for
BorgWarner 44–40.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine — 5.7L
Component
Engine Coolant
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/
Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT
(Organic Additive Technology).
Engine Oil
We recommend you use API Certified SAE
5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS6395 such as Mopar, Pennzoil, and Shell
Helix. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for
correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil Filter
We recommend you use Mopar Engine Oil
Filters.
Spark Plugs
We recommend you use Mopar Spark Plugs.
Fuel Selection – With Automatic Transmission 89 Octane recommended – 87 Octane acceptable, 0-15% Ethanol.
Fuel Selection – With Manual Transmission 91 Octane or higher, 0-15% Ethanol.
Chassis — 5.7L Automatic Transmission
Component
8-Speed Automatic Transmission
Brake Master Cylinder
Rear Axle – With Automatic
Transmission
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Use only Mopar ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission
Fluid, or equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may
affect the function or performance of your transmission.
We recommend you use Mopar DOT 3, SAE J1703. If DOT
3 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable.
We recommend you use Mopar OD Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W85 (API GL-5).
Chassis — 5.7L Manual Transmission
Component
Manual Transmission
Brake Master Cylinder
Rear Axle – With Manual
Transmission
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use Mopar ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
We recommend you use Mopar DOT 3, SAE J1703. If DOT
3 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable.
We recommend you use Mopar LSD Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W85 (API GL-5).
221
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine — 6.4L
Component
Engine Coolant
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/
Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT
(Organic Additive Technology).
For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions,
the manufacturer only recommends full synthetic engine oils.
The manufacturer recommends the use of
Pennzoil Ultra 0W-40 or equivalent Mopar
engine oil meeting the requirements of FCA
Material Standard MS-12633 for use in all
operating temperatures.
We recommend you use Mopar Engine Oil
Filters.
We recommend you use Mopar Spark Plugs.
91 Octane or higher, 0-15% Ethanol.
Engine Oil
Engine Oil Filter
Spark Plugs
Fuel Selection
Chassis — 6.4L Automatic Transmission
Component
8-Speed Automatic Transmission
Brake Master Cylinder
Rear Axle
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Use only Mopar ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission
Fluid, or equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may
affect the function or performance of your transmission.
We recommend you use Mopar DOT 3, SAE J1703. If DOT
3 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable.
We recommend you use Mopar LSD Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W85 (API GL-5).
Chassis — 6.4L Manual Transmission
Component
Manual Transmission
Brake Master Cylinder
Rear Axle
222
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use Mopar ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
We recommend you use Mopar DOT 3, SAE J1703. If DOT
3 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable.
We recommend you use Mopar LSD Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W85 (API GL-5).
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS — SRT
Important Information
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may
decrease corrosion protection. Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is
different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT)
engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a
non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system in an
emergency, the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with
fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not
use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not be compatible
with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not
recommended.
223
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine
Component
Engine/Intercooler Coolant
Engine Oil
Engine Oil Filter
Spark Plugs
Fuel Selection
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/
150,000 Mile Formula OAT coolant conforming to
MS.90032.
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only recommends full synthetic engine oils.
The manufacturer recommends the use of Pennzoil Ultra
0W-40 or equivalent Mopar engine oil meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-12633 for use in all
operating temperatures.
Mopar Engine Oil Filter or equivalent.
We recommend you use Mopar Spark Plugs.
91 Octane or higher, 0-15% Ethanol.
Chassis
Component
Manual Transmission – If
Equipped
Automatic Transmission – If
Equipped
Hydraulic Power Steering
Reservoir – If Equipped
Brake Master Cylinder
Rear Axle
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use Mopar ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Use only Mopar ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission
Fluid, or equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may
affect the function or performance of your transmission.
We recommend you use Mopar Hydraulic System Power
Steering Fluid or equivalent meeting the requirements of
FCA Material Standard MS-10838.
We recommend you use Mopar DOT 3, SAE J1703 should
be used. If DOT 3, SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available,
then DOT 4 is acceptable.
DOT 4 brake fluid must be changed every 24 months. This
interval is time based only, mileage intervals do not apply.
We recommend you use Mopar LSD Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W85 (API GL-5).
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
For information on the maintenance procedures for your vehicle, please refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” in your Owner’s Manual or an
applicable supplement at www.dodge.com/en/owners/manuals for further information.
224
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE — 3.6L
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change indicator system. The oil change
indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled
maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change indicator message will illuminate.
This means that service is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions such as frequent
short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or cold ambient temperatures, and E85 fuel usage
will influence when the “Change Oil” or “Oil Change Required” message is displayed.
Severe Operating Conditions can cause the change oil message to illuminate as early as
3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last reset. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible,
within the next 500 miles (805 km).
The message “Oil Change Required” will be displayed in the instrument cluster and a
single chime will sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary.
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the
scheduled oil change. If a scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than your
authorized dealer, the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under
“Instrument Cluster Warning Lights” in “What To Do In Emergencies” in this guide, or
“Instrument Cluster Display” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” in your Owner’s
Manual on www.dodge.com/en/owners/manuals for further information.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km)
or twelve months or 350 hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The 350 hours
of engine run or idle time is generally only a concern for fleet customers.
Severe Duty All Models
Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) if the vehicle is operated in a dusty and off
road environment or is operated predominately at idle or only very low engine RPM’s. This
type of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
• Check engine oil level.
• Check windshield washer fluid level.
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or damage. Rotate tires at the first sign
of irregular wear, even if it occurs before your next scheduled service.
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake master cylinder, and power
steering and fill as needed.
• Check function of all interior and exterior lights.
225
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE — 5.7L
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change indicator system. The oil change
indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled
maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change indicator message will illuminate.
This means that service is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions such as frequent
short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or cold ambient temperatures, and E85 fuel usage
will influence when the “Change Oil” or “Oil Change Required” message is displayed.
Severe Operating Conditions can cause the change oil message to illuminate as early as
3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last reset. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible,
within the next 500 miles (805 km).
The message “Oil Change Required” will be displayed in the instrument cluster and a
single chime will sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary.
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the
scheduled oil change. If a scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than your
authorized dealer, the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under
“Instrument Cluster Warning Lights” in “What To Do In Emergencies” in this guide, or
“Instrument Cluster Display” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” in your Owner’s
Manual on www.dodge.com/en/owners/manuals for further information.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km),
twelve months or 350 hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The 350 hours of
engine run or idle time is generally only a concern for fleet customers.
Severe Duty All Models
Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) if the vehicle is operated in a dusty and
off-road environment or is operated predominately at idle or only very low engine RPM’s.
This type of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
• Check engine oil level.
• Check windshield washer fluid level.
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or damage. Rotate tires at the first sign
of irregular wear, even if it occurs before your next scheduled service.
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake master cylinder, and power
steering and fill as needed.
• Check function of all interior and exterior lights.
226
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Maintenance Chart — 3.6L And 5.7L
Required Maintenance Intervals
Refer to the maintenance chart for the required maintenance intervals.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:
• Change oil and filter
• Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before your next
scheduled service
• Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required
• Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and park brake
• Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses
• Inspect exhaust system
• Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or off-road conditions
227
228
X
X
X
Inspect the manual transmission fluid (if
equipped).
Inspect the brake linings, replace as necessary.
Adjust park brake on vehicles equipped
with four wheel disc brakes.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Flush and replace the engine coolant at
10 years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km)
whichever comes first.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Replace spark plugs.*
Replace cabin/air conditioning filter.
Replace engine air filter.
Additional Maintenance
X
X
Inspect the rear axle fluid. Inspect the front
axle fluid (All Wheel Drive Only).
Inspect transfer case fluid (All Wheel Drive Only).
X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends, boot
seals and replace if necessary.
Inspect the CV joints.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Or Kilometers:
X
20,000
32,000
X
48,000
X
64,000
X
80,000
X
96,000
X
112,000
Additional Inspections
15
14
13
30,000
12
40,000
11
50,000
10
60,000
9
70,000
8
80,000
128,000
7
90,000
144,000
6
100,000
160,000
5
110,000
176,000
4
120,000
192,000
3
130,000
208,000
2
140,000
224,000
Or Years:
150,000
240,000
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
48,000
20,000
32,000
50,000
X
80,000
70,000
40,000
30,000
90,000
X
X
X
• You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right
equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and
performance. This could cause an accident.
WARNING!
* The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, yearly intervals do not apply.
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary.
Change the rear axle fluid and on models
equipped with All Wheel Drive (AWD)
change the front axle fluid if using your
vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi,
fleet, off-road, or frequent trailer towing.
Inspect the transfer case fluid. Change the
transfer case fluid; if using your vehicle for any
of the following: police, taxi, fleet, off-road, or
frequent trailer towing. (All Wheel Drive Only).
X
64,000
Or Kilometers:
60,000
X
80,000
X
96,000
X
7
112,000
X
8
128,000
Change the manual transmission fluid (if
equipped) if using your vehicle for any of the following: Most of your driving is at sustained
speeds during hot weather, above 90°F (32°C),
driving in dusty conditions, or stop and go driving.
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
144,000
6
100,000
160,000
5
110,000
176,000
4
120,000
192,000
3
130,000
208,000
2
140,000
224,000
Or Years:
150,000
240,000
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
229
230
20,000 Miles
(32,000 km) or
2 Years
30,000 Miles
(48,000 km) or
3 Years
40,000 Miles
(64,000 km) or
4 Years
50,000 Miles
(80,000 km) or
5 Years
60,000 Miles
(96,000 km) or
6 Years
70,000 Miles
(112,000 km) or
7 Years
80,000 Miles
(128,000 km) or
8 Years
Odometer
MAINTENANCE RECORD
Date
Signature, Authorized Service Center
90,000 Miles
(144,000 km) or
9 Years
100,000 Miles
(160,000 km) or
10 Years
110,000 Miles
(176,000 km) or
11 Years
120,000 Miles
(192,000 km) or
12 Years
130,000 Miles
(208,000 km) or
13 Years
140,000 Miles
(224,000 km) or
14 Years
150,000 Miles
(240,000 km) or
15 Years
Odometer
Date
Signature, Authorized Service Center
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE — 6.2L SUPERCHARGED
The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in this manual must be done at the times or
mileages specified to protect your vehicle warranty and ensure the best vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent maintenance may be needed for vehicles in severe
operating conditions, such as dusty areas and very short trip driving. Inspection and
service should also be done anytime a malfunction is suspected.
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance.
The message “Oil Change Required” will be displayed in the instrument cluster and a
single chime will sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change indicator message will illuminate.
This means that service is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as
possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
NOTE:
• The oil change indicator message will not monitor the time since the last oil change.
Change your vehicle's oil if it has been six months since your last oil change, even if the
oil change indicator message is NOT illuminated.
• Change your engine oil more often if you drive your vehicle off-road for an extended
period of time.
• Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6,000 miles (10,000 km)
or six months, whichever comes first.
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the
scheduled oil change. If a scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than your
authorized dealer, the message can be reset. Refer to the steps described under
“Instrument Cluster Warning Lights” in “What To Do In Emergencies” in this guide, or
“Instrument Cluster Display” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” in your Owner’s
Manual on www.dodge.com/en/owners/manuals, for further information.
At Each Stop For Fuel
• Check the engine oil level. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures/Engine Oil” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
• Check the windshield washer solvent and add if required.
Once A Month
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or damage.
• Inspect the battery, and clean and tighten the terminals as required.
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake master cylinder, and power
steering, and add as needed.
• Check all lights and other electrical items for correct operation.
231
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
At Each Oil Change
• Change the engine oil filter.
• Inspect the brake hoses and lines.
CAUTION!
Failure to perform the required maintenance items may result in damage to the vehicle.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE — 6.4L
The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in this manual must be done at the times or
mileages specified to protect your vehicle warranty and ensure the best vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent maintenance may be needed for vehicles in severe
operating conditions, such as dusty areas and very short trip driving. Inspection and
service should also be done anytime a malfunction is suspected.
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance.
The message “Oil Change Required” will be displayed in the instrument cluster and a
single chime will sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change indicator message will illuminate.
This means that service is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as
possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
NOTE:
• The oil change indicator message will not monitor the time since the last oil change.
Change your vehicle's oil if it has been six months since your last oil change, even if the
oil change indicator message is NOT illuminated.
• Change your engine oil more often if you drive your vehicle off-road for an extended
period of time.
• Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6,000 miles (10,000 km)
or six months, whichever comes first.
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the
scheduled oil change. If a scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than your
authorized dealer, the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under
“Instrument Cluster Warning Lights” in “What To Do In Emergencies” in this guide, or
“Instrument Cluster Display” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” in your Owner’s
Manual on www.dodge.com/en/owners/manuals, for further information.
232
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
At Each Stop For Fuel
• Check the engine oil level. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures/Engine Oil” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
• Check the windshield washer solvent and add if required.
Once A Month
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or damage.
• Inspect the battery, and clean and tighten the terminals as required.
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake master cylinder, and power
steering, and add as needed.
• Check all lights and other electrical items for correct operation.
At Each Oil Change
• Change the engine oil filter.
• Inspect the brake hoses and lines.
CAUTION!
Failure to perform the required maintenance items may result in damage to the vehicle.
233
132,000
126,000
12,000
X
X
X
Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
Inspect the CV joints.
Inspect the exhaust system.
18,000
X
Inspect the rear axle fluid.
Change the manual transmission fluid – if
equipped.
X
X
X
30,000
Inspect the manual transmission fluid – if
equipped.
Adjust the parking brake on vehicles
equipped with four wheel disc brakes.
X
X
X
If using your vehicle for any of the following:
dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
X
Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before scheduled maintenance.
X
X
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
20,000
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends, and
boot seals, for cracks or leaks and all parts
for damage, wear, improper looseness or end
play; replace if necessary.
10,000
Or Kilometers:
24,000
40,000
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
50,000
X
X
X
36,000
60,000
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
42,000
70,000
X
X
48,000
80,000
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
54,000
90,000
X
X
X
X
60,000
100,000
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
66,000
110,000
X
X
72,000
120,000
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
78,000
130,000
X
X
84,000
140,000
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
90,000
150,000
X
X
X
X
X
96,000
160,000
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
102,000
170,000
X
X
108,000
180,000
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
114,000
190,000
X
X
120,000
200,000
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
210,000
6,000
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
220,000
6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150
138,000
X
X
230,000
Or Months:
144,000
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
240,000
Miles:
150,000
X
X
X
250,000
234
30,000
Maintenance Chart — 6.2L Supercharged And 6.4L
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
138,000
132,000
78,000
48,000
12,000
20,000
X
24,000
40,000
X
30,000
50,000
X
36,000
60,000
X
80,000
X
X
60,000
X
100,000
X
X
72,000
120,000
X
130,000
66,000
110,000
54,000
90,000
42,000
70,000
18,000
30,000
10,000
126,000
96,000
84,000
140,000
X
90,000
150,000
X
X
160,000
X
X
X
108,000
180,000
X
120,000
X
200,000
X
X
X
210,000
114,000
190,000
102,000
170,000
X
X
X
X
X
• You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right
equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and
performance. This could cause an accident.
WARNING!
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, yearly intervals do not apply.
Flush and replace the engine coolant at
120 months if not done at 150,000 miles
(240,000 km).
Replace the spark plugs – 6.4L Engine **
Replace the spark plugs – 6.2L Supercharged Engine **
Inspect and replace the PCV Valve if necessary
Replace the air conditioning filter.
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Change the rear axle fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi,
fleet or frequent trailer towing.
Or Kilometers:
220,000
6,000
230,000
6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150
144,000
240,000
Or Months:
150,000
250,000
Miles:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
235
236
6,000 Miles
(10,000 km) or
6 Months
12,000 Miles
(20,000 km) or
12 Months
18,000 Miles
(30,000 km) or
18 Months
24,000 Miles
(40,000 km) or
24 Months
30,000 Miles
(50,000 km) or
30 Months
36,000 Miles
(60,000 km) or
36 Months
42,000 Miles
(70,000 km) or
42 Months
Odometer Date
Signature, Authorized
Service Center
6.2L SUPERCHARGED AND 6.4L MAINTENANCE RECORD
48,000 Miles
(80,000 km) or
48 Months
54,000 Miles
(90,000 km) or
54 Months
60,000 Miles
(100,000 km)
or
60 Months
66,000 Miles
(110,000 km)
or
66 Months
72,000 Miles
(120,000 km)
or
72 Months
78,000 Miles
(130,000 km)
or
78 Months
Odometer Date
Signature, Authorized
Service Center
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FUSES
WARNING!
• When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appropriate replacement fuse with the
same amp rating as the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another fuse of higher
amp rating. Never replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any other material. Failure
to use proper fuses may result in serious personal injury, fire and/or property damage.
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition is off and that all the other
services are switched off and/or disengaged.
• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an authorized dealer.
• If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air bag system, braking system),
power unit systems (engine system, gearbox system) or steering system blows,
contact an authorized dealer.
Front Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
The Front Power Distribution Center is located in the engine compartment. This module
contains fuses and relays. Fuse cavity location and descriptions are printed on the inside
of the power distribution center cover.
CAUTION!
• When installing the power distribution center cover, it is important to ensure the
cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow water to get
into the power distribution center and possibly result in an electrical system failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use only a fuse having the correct
amperage rating. The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a
dangerous electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it
indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
Cavity
1
2
Cartridge Fuse
–
40 Amp Green
Mini-Fuse
–
–
3
50 Amp Red
–
4
5
6
7
8
9
30 Amp Pink
40 Amp Green
30 Amp Pink
20 Amp Blue
20 Amp Blue
–
–
–
–
–
–
20 Amp Yellow
Description
Fuse – Spare
Radiator Fan #1 – (Non 6.2L
Supercharged)
Electric Power Steering #1 – If
Equipped / Radiator Fan (6.2L
Supercharged) – If Equipped
Starter
Anti Lock Brake
Anti Lock Brake
Police Ignition Run / ACC #1
Police Ignition Run / ACC # 2
All-Wheel Drive Module – If
Equipped
237
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
10
Cartridge Fuse
–
Mini-Fuse
10 Amp Red
11
12
13
14
15
16
18
–
–
–
–
–
–
50 Amp Red
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
–
–
20 Amp Yellow
20 Amp Yellow
–
19
50 Amp Red
–
20
21
–
–
23
24
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
20 Amp Blue –
Police
40 Amp Green
/ 20 Amp Blue
– Police
20 Amp Blue
20 Amp Blue
28
29
–
–
–
15 Amp Blue
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
25 Amp Clear
–
–
25 Amp Clear
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
38
–
10 Amp Red
22
238
–
–
–
Description
Intrusion MOD (300) – If
Equipped / Under Hood Lamp –
Police
Horns
Air Conditioning Clutch
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Left HID – If Equipped
Right HID – If Equipped
Radiator Fan – (Non 6.2L Supercharged)
Electric Power Steering #2 – If
Equipped / Radiator Fan #2
(6.2L Supercharged)
Wiper Motor
Headlamp Washers – If
Equipped
Police Bat Feed #2
Engine Cooling Pump (6.2L
Supercharged) / Police Bat Feed
#3
Police Bat Feed # 1
Police Ignition Run/ACC Feed #
3
Fuse – Spare
Transmission Control Module
(Challenger/Charger Police) /
Electronic Shift Module
(Challenger)
Fuse – Spare
Engine Module
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Powertrain #1
Powertrain #2
Anti-Lock Brake Module
Engine Controller / Rad Fan Relays (Charger/300) / Electric
Power Steering Module
(Charger/300) / 5-Speed TCM
Airbag Module
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
39
Cartridge Fuse
–
48
–
49
50
51
52
53
–
–
–
–
–
Mini-Fuse
10 Amp Red
Description
EPS (Challenger) / EHPS (Police) / AC Clutch Relay / Vacuum
Pump Relay / Rad Fan Relays
(Challenger)
10 Amp Red
AWD Module/Front Axle Disconnect – If Equipped
–
Fuse – Spare
–
Fuse – Spare
20 Amp Yellow
Vacuum Pump
5 Amp Tan
Adaptive Cruise – If Equipped
–
Fuse – Spare
Rear Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
There is also a power distribution center located in the trunk under the spare tire access
panel. This center contains fuses and relays. Fuse cavity location and descriptions are
printed on the inside of the power distribution center cover.
CAUTION!
• When installing the power distribution center cover, it is important to ensure the
cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow water to get
into the power distribution center and possibly result in an electrical system failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use only a fuse having the correct
amperage rating. The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a
dangerous electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it
indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
Cavity
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cartridge Fuse
60 Amp Yellow
–
60 Amp Yellow
30 Amp Pink
20 Amp Blue – Police
40 Amp Green
40 Amp Green
30 Amp Pink
40 Amp Green
30 Amp Pink
Mini-Fuse
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Description
Front PDC Feed #1
Fuse – Spare
Front PDC Feed #2
Sunroof/Dome Lamp –
Police
Exterior Lighting #1
Exterior Lighting #2
Interior Lighting
Power Locks
Driver Door Control
Module
239
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
11
Cartridge Fuse
30 Amp Pink
Mini-Fuse
–
–
20 Amp Yellow
40 Amp Green
20 Amp Blue
–
30 Amp Pink
–
–
–
–
–
–
30 Amp Pink
–
–
–
–
–
20 Amp Yellow –
Police
10 Amp Red
–
–
–
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
15 Amp Blue
–
–
25 Amp Clear
25 Amp Breaker
–
–
15 Amp Blue
15 Amp Blue
–
10 Amp Red
–
–
5 Amp Tan
15 Amp Blue
–
–
20 Amp Yellow
20 Amp Yellow
–
–
12
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
40
240
Description
Passenger Door Control
Module
Dual USB Center Console Rear/Cigar Lighter
IP – If Equipped
HVAC Blower
Left Spot Lamp – Police
Fuse – Spare
Mod Network Interface
– Police
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Fuel Pump
Right Spot Lamp –
Police
Fuel Door/Diagnostic
Port
Integrated Center Stack
Tire Pressure Monitor
Cygnus Transmission
Module (Charger/300) /
Electronic Shift Module
(Charger/300)
Amplifier – If Equipped
Power Seats – If
Equipped
HVAC Module/Cluster
Ignition Switch/RF Hub
Module/Steering Column Lock (300) – If
Equipped
Steering Column
Module/Clock (300)
Battery Sensor
Electronic Exhaust
Valve – If Equipped
Radio
Power Outlet Inside Arm
Rest/Console Media
Hub
Fuse – Spare
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
41
42
Cartridge Fuse
–
30 Amp Pink
–
Mini-Fuse
–
–
20 Amp Yellow
–
10 Amp Red
–
15 Amp Blue
–
–
–
10 Amp Red
–
20 Amp Yellow
49
50
–
–
–
–
51
–
20 Amp Yellow
52
–
10 Amp Red
53
–
10 Amp Red
54
55
56
57
58
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
10 Amp Red
59
–
20 Amp Yellow
60
61
62
–
–
–
–
–
–
43
44
45
46
47
48
Description
Fuse – Spare
Rear Defrost
Comfort Seat And Steering Wheel Module
(Heated Steering
Wheel/RR Heated
Seats)
Park Assist / Blind Spot /
Rear View Camera
Cluster / Rearview Mirror /
Compass (Charger/300) /
Humidity Sensor / Forward Facing Camera
(Lane Departure)
Fuse – Spare
Adaptive Front Lighting /
Day Time Running
Lamps – If Equipped
Active Suspension –
(6.4L / 6.2L)
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Front Heated / Vented
Seats – If Equipped
Heated Cupholders/Rear
Heated Seat Switches –
If Equipped
HVAC Module/In Vehicle
Temperature Sensor
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Airbag Module
Adjustable Pedals –
Police
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
241
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
63
Cartridge Fuse
–
Mini-Fuse
–
64
–
25 Amp Breaker
65
66
–
–
10 Amp Red
–
67
–
10 Amp Red
68
–
10 Amp Red
69
70
–
–
–
–
Description
Fuse – Spare
Rear Windows (Charger/
300)
Airbag Module
Fuse – Spare
Rain and Light Sensor /
Sunroof / Inside RR
View Mirror / Police Run
Acc Relay
Dual USB Power Outlet
– R/A Sense (Charger/
300) Rear Sunshade
(Charger/300) RR USB
Timer
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings
NOTE:
• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is
based on U.S. design standards.
P-Metric tires have the letter “P” molded
into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European — Metric tire sizing is based
on European design standards. Tires designed to this standard have the tire size
molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter "P" is absent
from this tire size designation. Example:
215/65R15 96H.
1 — U.S. DOT
Safety Standards
Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is 3 — Service
based on U.S. design standards. The Description
size designation for LT-Metric tires is the
same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the
sidewall preceding the size designation.
Example: LT235/85R16.
242
4 — Maximum
Load
5 — Maximum
Pressure
6 — Treadwear,
Traction and
Temperature
Grades
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary emergency use only. Temporary high
pressure compact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into the sidewall
preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards and it begins with the tire
diameter molded into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C,
T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or
"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
– Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
– "R" means radial construction, or
– "D" means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
– A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
– A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding
to its load index under certain operating conditions
– The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions,
and posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a
Standard Load (SL) tire:
• XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
• LL = Light load tire or
• C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified
pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire
inflation pressure for this tire
243
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only
be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date code,
located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of
black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard
side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
• This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
• 03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
• 01 means the year 2001
• Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the
3rd week of 1981 or 1991
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term
B-Pillar
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Maximum Inflation Pressure
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation
Pressure
Tire Placard
244
Definition
The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the
body located behind the front door.
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after
sitting for a minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square
inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum
permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire.
The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the
sidewall.
Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard.
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE:
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge
of the driver's side door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including the spare tire (if equipped), at least
monthly and inflate to the recommended pressure for your vehicle.
NOTE:
Refer to the Owner's Manual, or the Tire
Information Supplement, located in your
Owner’s Information kit for more information regarding tire warnings and
instructions.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
245
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can cause tire failure, affect
vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them.
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause collisions.
• Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can result in over-heating and tire failure.
• Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion shock. Objects on the road and chuck
holes can cause damage that results in tire failure.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your
vehicle.
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle
to drift to the right or left.
• Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle control.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information
about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in
the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front,
rear, and spare tires.
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the
tire on your vehicle. You will not exceed the tire's load carrying capacity if you adhere to the
loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and
Loading Information placard in “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting And Operating” section
of the Owner’s Manual, or the Tire Information Supplement, located in your Owner’s
Information kit.
NOTE:
Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front
and rear axles must not be exceeded. Refer to “Vehicle Loading” in “Starting And Operating”
in the Owner’s Manual, or the Tire Information Supplement, located in your Owner’s
Information kit for further information on GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle, locate the statement “The
combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on the
Tire and Loading Information placard. The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage
and trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed the weight referenced here.
246
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg
or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will
be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and
luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on
the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and
luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
247
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg, and there will be five 68 kg passengers in
your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 295 kg (635-340
(5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.
NOTE:
• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. The following table shows examples on how to calculate total load, cargo/
luggage, and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and
number and size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes only and may not
be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
• For the following example, the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never
exceed 865 lbs (392 kg).
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle
handling, and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the recommended load
capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them.
248
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your
vehicle. Four primary areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
• Safety and Vehicle Stability
• Economy
• Tread Wear
• Ride Comfort
Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause collisions.
• Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result in overheating and tire failure.
• Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to cushion shock. Objects on the road and
chuckholes can cause damage that result in tire failure.
• Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly,
resulting in loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your
vehicle.
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle
to drift to the right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability of the vehicle and can produce
a feeling of sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering.
NOTE:
• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause erratic and unpredictable steering
response.
• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnormal wear patterns and reduced
tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.
249
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride. Over-inflation produces a jarring
and uncomfortable ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver's side B-Pillar or rear edge of
the driver's side door.
At least once a month:
• Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not
make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires may look properly
inflated even when they are under-inflated.
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This
will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could damage the
valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always “cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold
tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven
for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of
three hours. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation
pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire
pressures vary with temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature
change. Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in the
Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the outside temperature = 32°F (0°C)
then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals
1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT
reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
250
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and within posted speed limits. Where
speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds,
maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important. Increased tire pressure and
reduced vehicle loading may be required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to your
authorized tire dealer or original equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe
operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum load is dangerous. The added
strain on your tires could cause them to fail. You could have a serious collision. Do not
drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph
(120 km/h).
Radial Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your
vehicle to handle poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Always use radial ply
tires in sets of four. Never combine them with other types of tires.
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it meets the following criteria:
• The tire has not been driven on when flat.
• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire (sidewall damage is not repairable).
• The puncture is no greater than a 1/4 of an inch (6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have experienced a loss of pressure should
be replaced immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and service description (Load Index and Speed Symbol).
Tire Types
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring, Summer, Fall and Winter).
Traction levels may vary between different all season tires. All season tires can be
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the tire sidewall. Use all season
tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of
your vehicle.
251
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry conditions, and are not intended to be
driven in snow or on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be aware these
tires are not designed for Winter or cold driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your
vehicle when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if roads are covered with
ice or snow. For more information, contact an authorized dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on
the tire sidewall. Use Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely
affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You could lose vehicle control,
resulting in severe injury or death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates the
possibility of loss of vehicle control.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires during the Winter. Snow tires can
be identified by a “mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and type to the
original equipment tires. Use snow tires only in sets of four; failure to
do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what was originally
equipped with your vehicle and should not be operated at sustained
speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph
(120 km/h), refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe
operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid and traction capability on wet or dry
surfaces may be poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit studded tires;
therefore, local laws should be checked before using these tire types.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after
a rapid loss of inflation pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the Run Flat
mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi
(96 kPa). Once a Run Flat tire reaches the Run Flat mode, it has limited driving
capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable.
It is not recommended to drive a vehicle loaded at full capacity, or to tow a trailer while a
tire is in the Run Flat mode.
See the tire pressure monitoring section for more information.
252
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Spare Tires — If Equipped
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead of a spare tire, please refer to the “Tire
Service Kit” section located in your Owner’s Information kit for further information.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take your vehicle through an
automatic car wash with a compact or limited use temporary spare installed. Damage
to the vehicle may result.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and wheel equivalent in look and function
to the original equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your vehicle. This
spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option,
refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only. You can identify if your vehicle
is equipped with a compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire and
Loading Information Placard located on the driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall
of the tire. Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T” or “S” preceding the
size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment tire should be repaired (or
replaced) and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare
wheel, since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire. Do not install
more than one compact spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
WARNING!
Compact and Collapsible spares are for temporary emergency use only. With these
spares, do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare
tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which apply to your spare.
Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
253
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Collapsible Spare Tire — If Equipped
The collapsible spare is for temporary emergency use only. You can identify if your vehicle
is equipped with a collapsible spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire and
Loading Information Placard located on the driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall
of the tire.
Collapsible spare tire description example: 165/80-17 101P.
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment tire should be repaired (or
replaced) and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is properly installed to the vehicle. Inflate the
collapsible tire using the electric air pump before lowering the vehicle.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the collapsible
spare wheel, since the wheel is designed specifically for the collapsible spare tire.
WARNING!
Compact and Collapsible spares are for temporary emergency use only. With these
spares, do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare
tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which apply to your spare.
Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only. This tire may look like the
originally equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare tire
may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the
temporary use full size spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as your
original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire and reinstall on the
vehicle at the first opportunity.
254
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use only. This tire is identified by a
label located on the limited use spare wheel. This label contains the driving limitations for
this spare. This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling.
Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use only. Installation of this limited use spare tire
affects vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the speed listed on the
limit use spare wheel. Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on your
Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear
edge of the driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original equipment tire at the first
opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss of
vehicle control.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not spin your vehicle's wheels above
30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further
information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may
cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your
vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously
when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the
speed.
255
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to help you in determining when
your tires should be replaced.
These indicators are molded into the bottom
of the tread grooves. They will appear as
bands when the tread depth becomes a
1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is
worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire
should be replaced. Refer to “Replacement
Tires” in this section for further information.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon
varying factors including, but not limited to:
Tire Tread
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
• Driving style.
• Tire pressure – Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns
to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life,
resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.
• Distance driven.
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or higher, and Summer tires typically
have a reduced tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle maintenance schedule
is highly recommended.
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six years, regardless of the remaining
tread. Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure. You could lose
control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little exposure to light as possible.
Protect tires from contact with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics. They should be
inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manufacturer
strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality and
performance when replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on “Tread Wear
Indicator” in this section. Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard or the Vehicle
Certification Label for the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and Speed Symbol
for your tire will be found on the original equipment tire sidewall.
See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the “Tire Safety Information” section of this
manual for more information relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.
256
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just
one tire can seriously affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a wheel, make sure
that the wheel’s specifications match those of the original wheels.
It is recommended you contact your authorized tire dealer or original equipment dealer
with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use
equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety, handling, and ride of your
vehicle.
WARNING!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than that specified for your vehicle. Some
combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions
and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering
and suspension components. You could lose control and have a collision resulting in
serious injury or death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved
for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity, other than what was originally
equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could result in tire
overloading and failure. You could lose control and have a collision.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result
in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and
odometer readings.
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels, should be
cleaned regularly using mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain their luster and to
prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the same soap solution recommended for the body of
the vehicle.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium
chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and other road chemicals used to melt ice or control dust
on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild soap to wipe away promptly. Do not use
harsh chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s protective coating that
helps keep them from corroding and tarnishing.
257
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
Many aftermarket wheel cleaners contain strong acids or strong alkaline additives that can
harm the wheel surface.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or strong alkaline
additives or harsh brushes. Many aftermarket wheel cleaners and automatic car washes
may damage the wheel's protective finish. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is
recommended.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including excessive brake dust, care must be taken
in the selection of tire and wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to prevent damage
to the wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment, Mopar Chrome Cleaner, or their equivalent is
recommended or select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or chrome
wheels. Do not use any products on Dark Vapor or Black Satin Chrome Wheels. They will
permanently damage this finish and such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush, metal polishes or oven cleaner.
These products may damage the wheel's protective finish. Such damage is not covered
by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.
NOTE:
If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an extended period after cleaning the
wheels with wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle for a few minutes before doing so. Driving the
vehicle and applying the brakes when stopping will reduce the risk of brake rotor
corrosion.
Dark Vapor Or Black Satin Chrome Wheels
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with these specialty wheels, DO NOT USE wheel cleaners,
abrasives, or polishing compounds. They will permanently damage this finish and such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. HAND WASH ONLY
USING MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular basis; this
is all that is required to maintain this finish.
258
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY
GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The specific grade rating assigned by
the tire's manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires
on your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in
addition to these grades.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on the wear rate of the
tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test
course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half times
as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative
performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in
driving habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and
climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These
grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement, as measured
under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt
and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking
traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning,
or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire's
resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat, when
tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test
wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to
degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which
259
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
all passenger vehicle tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance
on the laboratory test wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly
inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup
and possible tire failure.
ADDING FUEL
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the left side of the vehicle. Use a finger
to pull open the door. If the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure the replacement cap is for
use with this vehicle.
NOTE:
When removing the fuel filler cap, lay the cap tether in the hook, located on the fuel filler
door.
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the gas cap is
removed or the tank is being filled.
• Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is running.
• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a
vehicle. You could be burned. Always place gas containers on the ground while
filling.
CAUTION!
• Damage to the fuel system or emissions control system could result from using an
improper fuel tank filler tube cap.
• A poorly fitting fuel filler cap could let impurities into the fuel system.
• A poorly fitting fuel filler cap may cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” to
turn on.
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top off” the fuel tank after filling. When
the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is full.
260
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is full.
• Tighten the gas cap until you hear a “clicking” sound. This is an indication that the gas
cap is tightened properly. The MIL in the instrument cluster may turn on if the gas cap
is not secured properly. Make sure that the gas cap is tightened each time the vehicle
is refueled.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly
installed, or damaged, a ”gASCAP” message will display in the odometer or a “Check
Gascap” message will display in the instrument cluster. If this occurs, tighten the fuel
filler cap properly and press the TRIP ODOMETER button to turn off the message. If the
problem continues, the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started.
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap may also turn on the MIL. Refer
to “Onboard Diagnostic System” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Materials Added To Fuel
Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline contains a higher level of
detergents to further aide in minimizing engine and fuel system
deposits. When available, the usage of Top Tier Detergent gasoline is
recommended. Visit www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline Retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should be avoided. Many of these
materials intended for gum and varnish removal may contain active solvents or similar
ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket and diaphragm materials.
261
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
REPLACEMENT BULBS
All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or glass cartridge types. Aluminum base
bulbs are not approved and should not be used for replacement.
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Rear Courtesy/Reading Lamps
W5W
Rear Compartment (Trunk) Lamp
562
Overhead Console Reading Lamps
578
Visor Vanity Lamps
A6220
Glove Compartment Lamp – If Equipped
194
Door Courtesy
562
Shift Indicator Lamp
JKLE14140
Optional Door Map Pocket/Cupholder
LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
For lighted switches, see your authorized dealer for replacement instructions.
Exterior Bulbs
Headlamp – High Intensity Discharge (HID)
Halogen Headlamp
Front Park/Turn Lamp
Front Fog Lamp
Front Side Marker
Tail Lamp
Stop/Turn Lamp
Rear Side Marker
Backup Lamp
Center High-Mount Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
License
Bulb Number
D3S (Serviced At Authorized Dealer) *
HIR2LL
LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
H11LL
LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
* The headlamps are a type of high-voltage discharge tube. High voltage can remain in the
circuit even with the headlamp switch off and the key removed. Because of this, you
should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb yourself. If a headlamp bulb fails, take your
vehicle to an authorized dealer for service.
262
CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
FCA US LLC CUSTOMER CENTER
P.O. Box 21–8004 Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004 Phone: 1-800-423-6343
FCA CANADA INC. CUSTOMER CENTER
P.O. Box 1621 Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone: 1-800-465-2001 (English)
Phone: 1-800-387-9983 (French)
ASSISTANCE FOR THE HEARING IMPAIRED
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the manufacturer has installed special
TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer center. Any
hearing or speech impaired customer, who has access to a TDD or a conventional
teletypewriter (TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the manufacturer by
dialing 1-800-380-CHRY. Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY
teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain, or
emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or
other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.
PUBLICATIONS ORDERING
• You can purchase a copy of the Owner's Manual, Navigation/Uconnect Manuals or
Warranty Booklet. United States customers may visit the Dodge Contact Us page at
www.dodge.com scroll to the bottom of the page and select the “Contact Us” link, then
select the “Owner’s Manual and Glove Compartment Material” from the left menu. You
can also purchase a copy by calling 1-800-423-6343 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-1143
(Canada).
• Replacement User Guide kits, DVDs, or, if you prefer, additional printed copies of the
Owner's Manual, Warranty Booklet, or Radio Manuals may be purchased by visiting
www.techauthority.com or by calling 1-800-890-4038 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-1143
(Canada). Visa, Master Card, American Express and Discover orders are accepted.
NOTE:
• The Owner's Manual and User Guide electronic files are also available on the Chrysler,
Jeep®, Ram Truck, Dodge and SRT websites.
• Click on the “For Owners” tab, select “Owner/Service Manuals”, then select your
desired model year and vehicle from the drop down lists.
263
CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS IN THE UNITED STATES
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause
injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying FCA US LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it
finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall
and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your authorized dealer or FCA US LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); or go to http://
www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey
Avenue, SE., West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain
other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you should contact the
Customer Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish
to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should contact
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls at
1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/.
French Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the
Canadian government should contact Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle
Defect Investigations and Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://
www.tc.gc.ca/securiteroutiere/.
264
MOPAR® ACCESSORIES
AUTHENTIC ACCESSORIES BY MOPAR
• The following highlights just some of the many Authentic Dodge Accessories by Mopar
featuring a fit, finish, and functionality specifically for your Dodge Challenger.
• In choosing Authentic Accessories you gain far more than expressive style, premium
protection, or extreme entertainment, you also benefit from enhancing your vehicle
with accessories that have been thoroughly tested and factory-approved.
• For the full line of Authentic Dodge Accessories by Mopar, visit your local dealership or
online at mopar.com for U.S. residents and mopar.ca for Canadian residents.
NOTE:
All parts are subject to availability.
EXTERIOR:
• Custom Wheels
• Molded Splash Guards
• Decklid Spoiler With
Rearview Camera
• Engine Cover
• Full Vehicle Cover
• Graphics Packages
• T/A Hood
• Fuel Filler Doors
• Shaker Hood Package
INTERIOR:
• Slush Mats
• Katzkin Leather Interiors
• Door Sill Guards
• Cargo Mat
• Premium Carpet Floor Mats
ELECTRONICS:
• Rear Park Assist
• Kicker Speakers
PERFORMANCE:
• Cold Air Intake
• Scat Pack Performance
Packages
• Bright Pedal Kit
• Shifters
• Mopar Connect
• Electronic Vehicle
Tracking System
• Remote Start
• Cat Back Exhaust
• Performance Suspension
• Strut Tower Braces
• Anti Sway Bars
• Kicker is a registered trademark of Stillwater Designs and Audio, Inc.
265
F R E Q U E N T LY A S K E D Q U E S T I O N S
FAQs
GETTING STARTED
• How do I install my LATCH Equipped Child Seat? pg. 46
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE
• What is my engine break-in recommendation?
• Non SRT Version pg. 63
• SRT Version pg. 65
ELECTRONICS
• Which radio is in my vehicle?
• Uconnect 5.0 pg. 102
• Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV pg. 92
• How do I activate the Audio Jack?
• Uconnect 5.0 pg. 105
• Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV pg. 120
• How do I set the clock on my radio?
• Uconnect 5.0 pg. 103
• Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV pg. 113
• How do I use the Navigation feature?
• Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV pg. 130
• How do I pair my cell phone via Bluetooth with the Uconnect Hands-Free Voice
Activation System? pg. 149
• How do I configure my Universal Garage Door Opener (HomeLink)? pg. 162
• How do I improve the Bluetooth performance of my Uconnect System? pg. 155
UTILITY
• How do I know how much I can tow with my vehicle? pg. 167
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
• What do I do if my TPMS warning light is blinking? pg. 178
• How do I change a flat tire? pg. 186
• How do I use my Tirefit kit? pg. 193
• How do I Jump-Start my vehicle? pg. 199
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• Where is my Fuse Block located? pg. 237
• What type of oil do I use? pg. 220
• How often should I change my engine’s oil? pg. 224
• What should my tire pressure be set at? pg. 245
266
INDEX
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265
Mopar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
(Cruise Control). . . . . . . . . . . .72
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . .224
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260
Adding Washer Fluid. . . . . . . . . .224
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
Adjust
Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . .52, 57
Rearward . . . . . . . . . . . .52, 57
Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Aftermarket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Advance Front Air Bag . . . . . . .30
Air Bag Operation . . . . . . . . . .32
Air Bag Warning Light . . . . . . . .29
Enhanced Accident
Response . . . . . . . . . . .37, 207
Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . .207
Front Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . .30
If A Deployment Occurs . . . . . . .37
Knee Impact Bolsters . . . . . . . .32
Maintaining Your Air Bag System .38
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light .30
Side Air Bags . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . .50
Air Bag Light. . . . . . . . . . . .29, 182
Air Bag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . .38
Air Cleaner, Engine
(Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . . .224
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . .224
Air Conditioning . . . . . .82, 83, 84, 85
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . .224
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . .224
Air Pressure, Tires . . . . . . . . . . .250
Alarm
Vehicle Security Alarm . . . . . . .20
Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . .20, 184
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . .218,
219, 224
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . .181
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . .224
Arming System (Security Alarm) . . . .20
Assistance Towing . . . . . . . . . . .177
Audio Jack . . . . . . . . . . . .105, 120
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . .67, 184
Automatic High Beams . . . . . . .67, 68
Automatic Temperature
Control (ATC) . . . . . . . .82, 83, 84
Air Recirculation . . . . . . . . . .85
SYNC Temperature Button . . . . .85
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . .78
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . .220, 221,
222, 223, 224
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . .220, 221,
222, 223, 224
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
Axle Fluid . . .220, 221, 222, 223, 224
Axle Lubrication . . . . . . . .220, 221,
222, 223, 224
Back-Up Camera . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199, 224
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . .199
Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
Blind Spot Monitoring . . . . . . . . . .86
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . .224
Boost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . .245
Brake Fluid . .220, 221, 222, 223, 224
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
Fluid Check . . . . . . . .220, 221,
222, 223, 224
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . .224
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . .179
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160, 173
SRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160, 173
Braking Distance. . . . . . . . .160, 173
SRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160, 173
Break-In Recommendations,
New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . .262
Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4, 264
267
INDEX
Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . .218, 219
Caps, Filler
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . .224
Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
Change Oil Indicator . . . . . . . . . .183
Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . .186
Charging System Light. . . . . . . . .181
Chart, Tire Sizing. . . . . . . . . . . .243
Child Restraint. . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Child Restraints
Booster Seats . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . .39
Child Seat Installation . . . . . . . .48
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat
Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Infants And Child Restraints . . . .40
Lower Anchors And Tethers For
Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Older Children And Child Restraints .41
Seating Positions . . . . . . . . . .42
Cleaning
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . .224, 257
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . .224
Climate Control . . . . . . . . .82, 83, 84
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Cluster Warning/Indicator Lights
Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light . . .181
Charging System Light . . . . . .181
Electronic Speed Control ON
Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
Electronic Speed Control
SET Indicator . . . . . . . . . . .184
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC)
Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . .181
Engine Temperature Warning
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
Front Fog Light Indicator . . . . .184
Fuel Cap/Loose Gas Cap . . . . . .184
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . .184
Instrument Cluster Warning
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180
Oil Pressure Warning Light . . . .181
Park/Headlight ON Indicator . . .184
Turn Signal Indicator . . . . . . .184
Vehicle Security Light . . . . . . .184
268
Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
Clutch Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . .253
Cooling System. . . . . . . . . . . . .224
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . .224
Coolant Capacity . . . . . .218, 219
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . .224
Disposal Of Used Coolant . . . . .224
Drain, Flush, And Refill . . . . . .224
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
Points To Remember . . . . . . .224
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . .224
Selection Of Coolant
(Antifreeze) . . . . . . . .218, 219,
220, 221, 222, 223, 224
Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . .224
Customer Assistance. . . . . . .263, 264
Customer Programmable Features . .161
Dash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6, 7
Decklid
Release Button . . . . . . . . . . .17
Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . .264
Dimmer Control . . . . . . . . . . .67, 68
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . .67, 68
Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . .177, 205
Disarming, Security System. . . . . . .20
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . .224
Disturb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
Drive Modes . . . . . . . . . . .161, 168
Driver Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Driver Information Display
Instrument Cluster Display .157, 171
Electronic Power Distribution Center
(Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
Electronics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
Your Vehicle's Sound System . . . .90
Electronic Speed Control
(Cruise Control). . . . . . . . . . . .69
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . .177
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
OFF Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . .181
Electronic Throttle Control Warning
Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
Emergencies, What To Do In . . . . .177
INDEX
Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
Emergency, In Case Of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck . . .202
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186
Jump Starting . . . . .199, 200, 201
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . .185
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . .177, 205
Emergency Key . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
Break-In Recommendations . . . .63
Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . .224
Compartment . .210, 212, 214, 216
Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . .220, 221,
222, 223, 224
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
Jump Starting . . . . .199, 200, 201
Oil . . . . . . . . . .218, 219, 220,
221, 222, 223, 224
Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . .224
Oil Selection . . . . .218, 219, 224
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . .185
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Stopping . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Temperature Warning Light . . . .179
Engine Break-In
3.6L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
5.7L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
6.2L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
6.4L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Enhanced Accident Response
Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . .37, 207
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . .224
FAQ . . . . . . . . .
Filler Location Fuel
Filters
Air Cleaner . . .
Engine Oil . . .
. . . . . . . . . .266
. . . . . . . . . .260
. . . . . . . . . .224
. . . . . .220, 221,
222, 223, 224
Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . .224
Flashers
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . .184
Fluid, Brake. . . . . . . . . . .220, 221,
222, 223, 224
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . .218, 219
Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine
Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . .220, 223
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . .67, 184
Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Forward Collision Warning. . . . . . . .75
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . .202
Frequently Asked Questions . . . . . .266
Fuel
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . .184, 260
Materials Added . . . . . . . . . .261
Octane Rating . . . . . . .220, 221,
222, 223, 224
Specifications . . . . . . .220, 221,
222, 223, 224
Tank Capacity . . . . . . . .218, 219
Fueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
Garage Door Opener
(HomeLink) . . . . . . . . . .162, 164
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . .260
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6, 175
SRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
General Maintenance . . . . . . . . .224
G-Force. . . . . . . . . . .160, 173, 176
SRT . . . . . . . . . . .160, 173, 176
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
Glovebox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Hands-Free Phone (Uconnect) . . . .147
Headlamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66, 67
Headlights
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
Dimmer Switch . . . . . . . . .67, 68
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . .66, 67
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Head Rests. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
High Beam Indicator. . . . . . . . . .184
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer)
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66, 67
Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
HomeLink
Learn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
Promgramming . . . . . . . . . . .162
Train . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
269
INDEX
HomeLink (Garage Door
Opener) . . . . . . . . . . . .162, 164
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
Horsepower. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . .8
Instrument Cluster Display
Instrument Cluster Display . . . .157
Instrument Panel Cover . . . . . . . .224
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . .224
Interior And Instrument Lights . . . . . .7
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . .224
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) . . .66
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
Aftermarket Electronics . . . . . . . .5
Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
iPod/USB/MP3 Control
Bluetooth Streaming Audio . . . .147
Jacking Instructions .
Jack Location. . . . .
Jack Operation . . . .
Jump Starting . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . . . . .189
. . . . . . .186
. . . .186, 189
.199, 200, 201
Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12, 13
Black Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . .13
SRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . .13
Keyless Enter-N-Go . . . . . . . . . . .16
Accessory Postition . . . . . . . . .18
Automatic Trans . . . . . . . . .18, 19
Engine Starting . . . . . . . . .18, 19
Engine Stopping . . . . . . . . . . .19
Enter The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . .17
Lock The Vehicle’s Doors . . . . . .13
Lock/Unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Manual Trans . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Starting/Stopping . . . . . . . . . .18
Lane Change Assist
Lap History . . . . .
SRT . . . . . . .
Lap/Shoulder Belts
Lap Timer . . . . .
SRT . . . . . . .
270
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . . .66
.161, 174
.161, 174
. . . . .23
.160, 173
.160, 173
Latches
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
Left Switch
Steering Wheel Audio Controls . .156
Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
Lights
Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . .179
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . .184
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . .182
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . .184
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
Tire Pressure Monitoring
(TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178
Loading Vehicle
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245
Locks
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . .224
Maintaining Your Vehicle . . . . . . .208
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . .224
Maintenance, General . . . . . .208, 224
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . .224
Maintenance Record. . . . . . .230, 236
Maintenance Schedule. . . . .225, 226,
227, 231, 232, 234
Malfunction Indicator Light
(Check Engine) . . . . . . . . . . .180
Manual
Backward . . . . . . . . . . . .57, 58
Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . .57, 58
Rearward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Manual Park Release . . . . . . . . .203
Master Cylinder (Brakes). . . . . . . .224
Media Center Radio . . . . . . . . . .110
Mirrors
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Mopar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265
Mopar Accessories . . . . . . . . . . .265
INDEX
Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . .130, 133
New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . .63
Occupant Restraints. . . . . . . . . . .20
Octane Rating, Gasoline
(Fuel) . . . .220, 221, 222, 223, 224
Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . .183
Oil Change Indicator, Reset . . . . . .183
Oil, Engine. . .220, 221, 222, 223, 224
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . .218, 219
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . .224
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
Filter . . .220, 221, 222, 223, 224
Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . .224
Materials Added To . . . . . . . .224
Recommendation . . .218, 219, 224
Viscosity . . . . . . . .218, 219, 224
Oil Filter, Selection. . . . . . . . . . .224
Oil Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . .181
Outlet
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . .185
Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
ParkSense System, Rear . . . . . . . .77
Passenger Seat
Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Performance . . . . . . . . . . .157, 174
Personalized Menu Bar . . . . . . . .115
Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Phone, Hands-Free (Uconnect) . . . .147
Phone (Pairing). . . . . . . . . . . . .149
Phone (Uconnect) . . . . . . . .111, 147
Placard, Tire And Loading
Information . . . . . . . . . .245, 246
Power
Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . .239
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical
Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Tilt/Telescoping Steering
Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Power Seats
Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Power Lumbar . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Rearward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Power Steering Fluid . . . . . .220, 221,
222, 223, 224
Power Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts . . . .26
Preparation For Jacking . . . . . . . .188
Pretensioners
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Programmable Electronic
Features. . . . . . . . . . . .161, 171
Radial Ply Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . .251
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . .92, 102, 109
Balance and Fade . . . . . . . . .103
Equalizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . .103
Radio Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Radio
(Sound Systems) . .90, 92, 102, 109
Rain Sensitive Wiper System . . . . . .66
Rear Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Rear Cross Path . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
Rear ParkSense System . . . . . .77, 85
Rear Seat, Folding. . . . . . . . . . . .56
Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . .167
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
Release, Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
Reminder, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . .22
Remote Control
Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Remote Keyless Entry
Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . .13
Unlatch The Trunk . . . . . . . . . .17
Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . .13
Remote Starting System . . . . . . . .15
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . .262
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . .256
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . .264
Restraint, Head . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Right Switch
Steering Wheel Audio Controls . .156
Rocking Vehicle When Stuck . . . . .202
271
INDEX
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . .242
Schedule, Maintenance . . . .225, 226,
227, 231, 232
Seat Belt
Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Energy Management Feature . . . .27
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation . . . .25
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . .23
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting . . . .25
Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . .26
Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . .26
Seat Belt Pretensioner . . . . . . .26
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . .22
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . .224
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . .22
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . .39
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Front Seat . . . . . . . . .21, 23, 25
Operating Instructions . . . . . . .25
Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . .26
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . .25
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52, 54, 59
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . .52, 57
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . .51
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Height Adjustment . . . . . . . . .52
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Seatback Release . . . . . . . . . .56
Tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52, 59
Vented . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Ventilated . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . .220,
221, 222, 223, 224
Shift Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . .81
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Signals, Turn. . . . . . . . . . . .66, 184
Sirius Satellite Radio . . . . . .105, 117
Traffic & Weather . . . . . . . . . .133
SIRIUS Travel Link. . . . . . . . . . .133
SiriusXM Guardian. . . . . . . . . . . .94
272
Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
In Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . .97
Maintaining Your Account . . . . . .96
Mobile App . . . . . . . . . .96, 142
Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Remote Features . . . . . . . . . .99
Renewing Subscriptions . . . . . . .96
Send & Go . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Vehicle Finder . . . . . . . . . . .101
Vehicle Health Alert . . . . . . . .142
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252
Sound Systems (Radio) . . . . . .90, 92,
102, 120, 130
Spare Tire . . . . . .186, 253, 254, 255
Spark Plugs . .220, 221, 222, 223, 224
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline) . . . . . . .220, 221,
222, 223, 224
Oil . . . . .220, 221, 222, 223, 224
Speed . .158, 159, 160, 171, 172, 173
Speed Control
Accel/Decel . . . . . . . . . . .70, 71
Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
Distance Setting (ACC Only) . . . .74
Mode Setting (ACC Only) . . . . . .74
Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . .69
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Sport Mode . . . . . . . . . . . .81, 184
SRT
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
G-Force . . . . . . . . .160, 173, 176
Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
Lap History . . . . . . . . . .161, 174
Timers . . . . . . . . . . . .158, 159,
160, 171, 172, 173, 175
Top Speed . . . . . . . . . .161, 174
SRT Performance Features . . . . . .171
Starting
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Steering
Column Lock . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . .61, 62
Wheel, Heated . . . . . . . . . . .60
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . .61, 62
Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . .156
INDEX
Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
Sunroof
Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
Pinch Protection . . . . . . . . . . .89
Venting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
Supplemental Restraint System Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Telescoping Steering Column. . . .61, 62
Temperature Control,
Automatic (ATC). . . . . . .82, 83, 84
Text Messaging. . . . . . . . . .112, 154
Tilt
Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . .61, 62
Timers. . . . . . . . . . .158, 159, 160,
171, 172, 173, 175
SRT . . . . . . . . . . . . .158, 159,
160, 171, 172, 173, 175
Tire And Loading Information
Placard . . . . . . . . . . . .245, 246
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . .249, 253, 259
Aging (Life Of Tires) . . . . . . . .256
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . .245, 249
Changing . . . . . . .186, 189, 192
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . .253
Flat Changing . . . . . . . . . . .192
General Information . . . . .249, 253
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . .251
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . .250
Jacking . . . . . . . .186, 188, 189
Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . .256
Load Capacity . . . . . . . .245, 246
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . .178
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . .259
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251
Replacement . . . . . . . .192, 256
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . .242, 249
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . .252
Spare Tire . . . .186, 253, 254, 255
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . .256
Wheel Mounting . . . . . . . . . .192
Tire Safety Information. . . . . . . . .242
Tire Service Kit . . . . . . . . .193, 194,
195, 197, 198
To Open Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
Top Speed . . . . . . . . .161, 174, 176
SRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161, 174
Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . .205
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . .167
Towing Vehicle Behind A Motorhome. .167
Trailer Towing
Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . .167
Trailer Weight. . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
Transfer Case
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
Transmission
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
Fluid . . .220, 221, 222, 223, 224
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . .224
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . .182
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . .256
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . .66, 184
Uconnect 5.0 . . . . . . . . . . .92, 102
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV . . . . . .92, 113
Helpful Tips For Bluetooth . . . . .155
Mute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Phonebook . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Transfer Ongoing Call Between
Handset And Vehicle . . . . . . . .152
Voice Recognition Tips . . . . . . .153
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Voice Recognition
Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
SiriusXM Guardian . . . . . . . . .140
Uconnect (Hands-Free Phone)
Making A Phone Call . . . .147, 153
Receiving A Call . . . . . . . . . .147
Uconnect Phone . . . . . .147, 152, 154
Uconnect Voice Command . . .106, 107,
108, 109, 110, 111, 112, 134, 152
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . .259
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . .25
USB Port . . . . . . . . . . . . .105, 120
273
INDEX
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . .246
Vehicle User Guide
ICON Symbol Glossary . . . . . . .10
In Vehicle Help . . . . . . . . . . .10
IVH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
Operating Instructions . . . . . . . .10
Searching User Guide . . . . . . . .10
Ventilated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Voice Command . . . . .106, 107, 108,
109, 110, 111, 112, 152
Voice Recognition
System (VR) . . . . . . . . .106, 107,
108, 109, 110, 111,
112, 134, 152, 153
274
Washer
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . .224
Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . .66
Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . .224
Wheel And Wheel Trim . . . . .224, 257
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care. . .224, 257
Wind Buffeting. . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . .66
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . .224
Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . .66
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . .224
NOTES
275
NOTES
276
NOTES
277
NOTES
278
NOTES
279
NOTES
280
IMPORTANT
This User Guide is intended to familiarize you with the important
f e a t u r e s o f y o u r v e h i c l e . Yo u r O w n e r ’s M a n u a l , N a v i g a t i o n / U c o n n e c t
Manuals and Warranty Booklets can be found on your DVD (if applicable)
or by visiting the website on the back cover of your User Guide. We hope
you find it useful. U.S. residents can purchase replacement kits by
v i s i t i n g w w w. t e c h a u t h o r i t y. c o m a n d C a n a d i a n r e s i d e n t s c a n p u r c h a s e
replacement kits by calling 1-800-387-1143.
If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you
may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Owner’s
Manual, Navigation/Uconnect Manuals or Warranty Booklets by
calling 1-800-423-6343 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
or by contacting your dealer.
T h e d r i v e r ’s p r im a r y r e s p o n s i b i l i t y
is the safe operation of the
v e h i c l e . D r i v i ng w h i l e d i s t r a c t e d
can result in loss of vehicle
c o n t r o l , r e s u l t i ng i n a c o l l i s i o n
a n d p e r s o n a l i n j u r y. F C A U S L L C
s t r o ng l y r e c o mm e n d s t h a t t h e
d r i v e r u s e e x t r e m e c au t i o n w h e n
u s i ng a n y d e v i c e o r f e a t u r e t h a t
may take their at tention of f the
road. Use of any electrical devices,
such as cellular telephones,
c o mp u t e r s ,
por table
radios,
vehicle
n a v ig a t i o n
or
other
devices, by the driver while the
v e h i c l e i s m o v i ng i s d a ng e r o u s
and could lead to a serious
c o l l i s i o n . Te x t i ng w h i l e d r i v i ng i s
a l s o d a ng e r o u s a n d s h o u l d n e v e r
be done while the vehicle is
m o v i ng . I f y o u f i n d y o u r s e l f u n a b l e
to devote your full at tention to
vehicle operation, pull of f the
road to a safe location and stop
your vehicle. Some states or
provinces prohibit the use of
c e l l u l a r t e l e p h o n e s o r t e x t i ng
w h i l e d r i v i ng . I t i s a l w a y s t h e
d r i v e r ’s r e s p o n s i b i l i t y t o c o mp l y
with all local laws.
DODGE.COM (U.S.)
DODGE.CA (CANADA)
T h i s g u i d e h a s b e e n pr epar ed t o help y ou get quickly acquaint ed wit h y our
n e w Do d g e b ra n d v ehicle and t o pr ovide a convenient r ef er ence sour ce f or
c o m m o n q u e s ti o n s . H owever, it is not a subst it ut e f or y our Owner ’s Manual.
F o r c o m p l e te o p e rat ional inst r uct ions, maint enance pr ocedur es and
i m p o rta n t s a fe ty messages, please consult y our Owner ’s Manual,
Na v i g a ti o n /Uc o n n e ct Manuals and ot her War ning Labels in y our vehicle.
No t a l l fe a tu re s s hown in t his guide may apply t o y our vehicle. For
a d d i ti o n a l i n fo rm a t ion on accessor ies t o help per sonaliz e y our vehicle,
v i s i t www. m o p a r. c om ( U.S.) , www.mopar.ca ( Canada) or y our local
Do d g e b ra n d d e a l e r.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents.
Yo u r d r i v i n g a b i l i t y c a n b e s e r i o u s l y i m p a i r e d w i t h b l o o d a l c o h o l
levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive.
R i d e w i t h a d e s i g n a t e d n o n - d r i n k i n g d r i v e r, c a l l a c a b , a f r i e n d , o r
use public transportation.
WARNING!
D r i v i n g a f t e r d r i n k i n g c a n l e a d t o a n a c c i d e n t . Yo u r p e r c e p t i o n s a r e
l e s s s h a r p , y o u r r e f l e x e s a r e s l o w e r, a n d y o u r j u d g m e n t i s i m p a i r e d
when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
W h et h er it ’s p ro v i d i ng i nfo rm ati o n a b o u t s p e c i f i c p ro d u c t fe a tu re s ,
t a kin g a t ou r thro u g h yo ur v e hi c l e ’s h e ri tag e , k n o wi n g wh a t s te p s
t o t a ke f ollowing an ac c i de n t o r s c h e d u l i n g yo ur n e xt a p p o i n tm e n t,
w e know y ou ’ll f in d t h e ap p a n i mp o rta n t e xte n s i o n o f yo u r Do d g e b ra n d
vehi c l e . S im p ly d own lo a d the ap p , s e l e c t yo u r ma k e an d m o d e l a n d e n j o y
the ri de . To g et t h is a p p , g o di re c tl y to th e Ap p Sto re o r Go o g l e P l a y a n d
e nter the sea r ch key wor d “ D o d g e ” (U . S. m ark e ts o nl y).
Dodge. c o m / E N / O wn e r s pro v i de s s pe c i al o ffe rs tai l o re d to yo u r n e e d s ,
c ustom iz ed veh icle g a l l e ri e s , p e rs o n a l i ze d s e rv i c e re c o rd s a n d m o re .
To ge t th is in f or m a t ion , j u s t c re ate an ac c o u n t an d c he c k b a c k o fte n .
DOWNLOAD A FREE
ELECTRONIC COPY OF THE OWNER’S
MANUAL AND WARRANTY BOOKLET
2017
USER
CHALLENGER
GUIDE
INCLUDES SRT 392/SRT HELLCAT
BY VISITING:
W W W. MOPA R .COM / DODGE,
W W W.DODGE .COM / E N / O W NE R S / M A NU A L S
OR W W W.DODGE .COM / E N / WA R R A N T Y (U.S.);
W W W . O W N E R S . M O P A R . C A / E N ( C A N A D A ).
© 2 017 F C A U S L L C . A L L R I G H T S R E S E R V E D .
DODGE IS A REGISTERED TRADEMARK OF FCA US LLC.
17D491-926-AA
C H A L L E N GE R
F OURT H E DI T IO N REV 1
US E R GUI DE